JP2018110775A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines , there are known game machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional game machine, the display device displays the symbols in a variable manner, and the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed, so that the player is awarded a winning game. In addition to the design, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device, and various entertainments are executed to improve the entertainment of the game .

JP, 2003-325886, A

However, further interest is required. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, main control means for executing main control relating to the game, sub-control means for performing control based on the control signal output from the main control means, The main control means is based on that the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination conditions, and the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, a first output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result of the discriminating means to the sub-control means, and a predetermined acquisition condition being satisfied. On the basis of the discrimination information acquisition means for obtaining the discrimination information used for the discrimination of the discrimination means and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, the predetermined number of specific information is set as the upper limit, and the discrimination information is acquired. The determination condition is satisfied by a determination information storage unit configured to be able to store until the determination information is used by the determination unit and a determination information signal based on the determination information acquired by the determination information acquisition unit. Second output means capable of outputting to the sub control means before the sub control means, and the sub control means outputs the discrimination result signal output from the first output means and the second output means. The discrimination information signal, the signal reception means configured to be capable of receiving at least the discrimination information signal, and the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal based on the discrimination result signal received by the signal receiving means. A first effect executing means for executing a corresponding first effect, and whether the second effect is executed according to the received discrimination information signal, based on that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. Based on the first execution determination means for determining and the determination by the first execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, one or more of the first effects executed after the determination are performed. Based on the first setting means for setting the execution of the second effect over the execution period and the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, specific information according to the received discrimination information signal Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, an information storage unit configured to be capable of storing until a corresponding determination result signal is received by the signal receiving unit with a predetermined number of information as an upper limit. A state setting unit that sets a suppression state in which the setting of performance execution is suppressed and all the specific information stored in the information storage unit follow a predetermined rule at a time. A predetermined processing unit for performing a predetermined process; a unit configured to store predetermined data as a result of the predetermined process in a predetermined storage area, the data being composed of a group of data; A second execution determination that determines whether or not to execute the second effect by using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined storage area, triggered by the establishment of a predetermined specific condition after being set Means and the second execution determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed, and based on the determination that the second effect is to be executed, the first effect is executed over one or a plurality of execution periods of the first effect performed after the determination. Second setting means for setting execution of two effects .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is provided with main control means for executing main control relating to the game, and sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means. Then, the main control means, to the player based on the determination means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination result of the determination means is a predetermined specific determination result. The privilege game executing means for executing an advantageous privilege game, the first output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result of the determining means to the slave control means, and the determination based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. The discrimination information acquiring unit that acquires the discrimination information used to discriminate the unit, and the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquiring unit, with the predetermined specific information number as the upper limit, the obtained discrimination information is The discrimination information storage means configured to be memorable until it is used for the discrimination of the discrimination means, and the discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means are stored before the discrimination condition is satisfied. Second output means capable of outputting to the slave control means, wherein the slave control means outputs the determination result signal output from the first output means and the determination information signal output from the second output means. And a first effect according to the discrimination result indicated by the received discrimination result signal, based on the signal reception means configured to be capable of receiving at least the, and the discrimination result signal received by the signal reception means. And a first execution that determines whether to execute the second effect according to the received discrimination information signal, based on that the discrimination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. Based on the determination by the determination means and the first execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the one or more first effect execution periods that are executed after the determination are performed. Based on the first setting means for setting execution of the second effect and the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the specific information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is set to the predetermined information. Setting the execution of the second effect on the basis of information storage means configured to be capable of storing until the corresponding determination result signal is received by the signal receiving means with a number as an upper limit In order to perform a predetermined process according to a predetermined rule at a time on the state setting means for setting a restrained state in which is suppressed and all the specific information stored in the information storage means A predetermined processing unit, a unit configured to store predetermined data as a result of the predetermined process in a predetermined storage area, the data being composed of a group of data; and after the suppression state is set in advance. A second execution determination unit that determines whether or not to execute the second effect using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined storage area when the specified specific condition is satisfied, and the second execution determination unit. Based on the determination by the execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the execution of the second effect is set over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. Second setting means for

As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3 symbol display device in 1st Embodiment, (b) is an example of the display mode displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 1st Embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed. (A), (b) is the figure which shows one example of the indicatory aspect of the consecutive announcement production which is indicated with the 3rd design indicator in 1st execution form. (A), (b) is the figure which shows one example of the indicatory aspect of the consecutive announcement production which is indicated with the 3rd design indicator in 1st execution form. In the first embodiment, the time-dependent change in the effect mode from when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the state where there are two holding balls and after the completion of the continuous announcement effect until one variable display is executed. It is the figure which showed typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. 4C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of FIG. 4C, and FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the second per-random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main controller in the first embodiment, and (b) is a definition of a jackpot variation pattern table in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed the contents typically, (c) is the figure which shows the regulation contents of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table in 1st execution form typically, (d) 1st execution It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table in the form. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. .. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription|regulation content of the notice selection table in 1st Embodiment. In 1st Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the outline of the logical sum data produced|generated when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is cancelled|released. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information command processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows stop command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the notice production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. 6 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows stop classification command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the several command process. 6 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing according to the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device according to the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a configuration of a random number range selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment. FIG. 4C is a block diagram showing the above, and FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing the specified content of the random number range pattern table. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment. is there. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the point selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the subordinate random number table in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 13C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the release time selection table in the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the random number range command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a value of a high expectation type flag in the third embodiment and an expectation of a lottery result. It is the figure which showed the correspondence relationship with. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize information command processing 3 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the stop command process 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice production setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. In 4th Embodiment, it is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the lottery state after jackpot winning. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the winning a prize information command processing 4 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the discrimination|determination process at the time of cancellation performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp controller in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows a configuration of a RAM of a voice lamp controller in the modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is the block diagram shown. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the ending selection table in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front view of a detour combination thing in a 5th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode during the big hit displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a front perspective view showing a state in which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning a prize device in the sixth embodiment is closed, and (b) is an opening/closing door of the right variable winning a prize device in the sixth embodiment. It is a front perspective view showing the state in the middle of being. (A) is sectional drawing which showed the state which the opening/closing door of the right variable winning a prize apparatus in 6th Embodiment was completely open, (b) is the opening/closing door of the right variable winning a prize apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing which showed the state completely closed. (A) is a figure which showed typically the change over time of the state of the right specific winning a prize mouth when the open pattern which can be V winning is set in a 6th embodiment, and (b) is a 6th embodiment. In the form, it is a diagram schematically showing a temporal change in the state of the right specific winning opening 650a when an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult is set. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed in more detail the state of the opening/closing door during the opening period of 1 when the opening pattern which can be V winning is set in 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device at the time of 1 round start of the jackpot in which the open pattern which can be V winning is set. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main controller in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the sixth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of. It is a block diagram showing composition of RAM of a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control process 7 performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot operation setting process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot termination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control control equipment in 6th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the abnormal process performed by MPU in the main controller in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device in the probability change state displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 7th Embodiment, and during a time saving state. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 7th embodiment, and (b) is the main control in a 7th embodiment FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the device. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting winning a prize process 8 performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pre-reading process performed by MPU in the main controller in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 1st modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd modification of a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of a 7th embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported openably and closably on the front side.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball game is performed by letting a game ball flow down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, the inner frame 12 guides a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) that launches a game ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A launch rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the game balls thrown into the upper plate 17 are guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a “sand beach stage” and a “deep sea stage”. ing. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect, which are performed in association with the entry into the first entrance 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is produced or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “sand beach stage”→“deep sea stage” is changed. “→Sand beach stage”→... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sand beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, in the third pattern display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 which incorporate a light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in the midst of hitting, or that the reach is one step ahead of the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right decorative portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more brilliance.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the game ball is operated according to the operation. Will be rented. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine, which is a cash machine, in which game balls are directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of 40 to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing the game balls which could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. A touch sensor 51a for operating, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. A resistor (not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, and the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed. The game ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, whereby the game ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

The lower part of the lower plate 50 in front view is provided with a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the game balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. This ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The game ball spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower tray 50 is placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first winning opening 63. It is configured by assembling a ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, etc., and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to a back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted. At the inner position of the outer rail 62, a band-shaped metal plate is formed like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is a substantially circular area formed by partitioning the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 on the front surface of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and a game ball is launched). Is the area that flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game balls shot from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation where the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be prevented. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part of FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched with a force of a predetermined amount or more hits the return rubber 69. , The momentum is dampened and it bounces back toward the central part. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and a normal symbol (when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67). The second design) is drawn. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is held for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 game balls are won). Open) and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of game balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and thus a larger amount of award balls are paid out than usual. As the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "bonus A" and "bonus B" are provided, and as a value added after the jackpot ends after the special game state, the game according to these jackpot types. Value (game value) is given to the player.

Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds to 90 seconds) elapses, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the game ball enters the first ball inlet 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. It is shown by the display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits the game ball to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large amount of the game ball also enters the first entrance 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the game ball in the normal ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the game ball enters the first entrance 64. It becomes easy to do. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the game ball easily enters the first ball inlet 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the regular symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. And is also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next regular symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

As described above, two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" are provided as special jackpot types. In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R big hit). In addition, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol (during probability change of the special symbol) as an added value after the jackpot. The high-probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit of the special symbol. On the other hand, after the "big hit B" ends, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases until the lottery of the special symbol ends 100 times as an added value.

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called special symbol probability state (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (16R jackpot). ) Is the state of the game that is easy to move to. On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). In addition, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (time saving of the normal symbol) means that the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, and the game ball easily enters the first ball inlet 64. .. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", and this indicates that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is normal state (a state where the winning probability is lower than that during the time saving).

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of the jackpot, and the "high probability state of the special symbol" is set after the jackpot according to the type of the jackpot. It is changing whether or not it becomes "the time saving state of the normal design". On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. In addition, for example, the period of the "normal symbol time saving state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time saving state of the normal symbol, the time to open the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is lengthened, or the number of times to open the electric accessory 64a per ordinary symbol is increased. Is also good.

The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display or a variation by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed in association with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is in progress. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or a variation in the game balls entered in the first entrance 64 is not executed. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of certain game balls (reserved balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

If a game ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the maximum number of times the player can enter the ball is 4 times. The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is configured that the first ball entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding is not limited to four times and is not more than three times. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and depending on the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as shortening of working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64 (starting winning), it is used as a trigger to perform variable display of special symbols (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, to display, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right. To be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state according to the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The symbols, which are one of the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, are composed of nine types of main symbols to which the numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached and sub-symbols composed of shell-shaped symbols. It is configured. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by adding numbers "1" to "9" to nine types of character symbols such as octopus. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 8) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is out of order, the variable display is made in which the same main symbols are not arranged.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 5/6 on the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. 1/6 on the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a reserved ball number pattern indicating a reserved ball number, a notice character, and the like.

On the display screen (display area) of the main display area Dm, as a plurality of display areas, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper row, the interruption, and the lower row are set. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols. Then, on the display screen, the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction.

As shown in FIG. 4B, in the main display area Dm, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3×3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen (see FIG. 4A). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→the lower symbol row Z3, the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is completed, it is determined that a big hit has occurred, and a big hit moving image is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are equivalent to the “normal symbols”. When the 16R normal big hit "big hit B" occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are equivalent to "probably odd symbols". When the combination of the same probability variation symbols is stopped and displayed, the 16R probability variation jackpot "big hit A" occurs. In some cases where the “big hit A” occurs, after the combination of the same normal symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, an effect in which the normal symbol is changed to a probability variation symbol (so-called promotion effect) is executed. It As a result, even when the normal symbols are (or are likely to be) aligned, the player can continue to have an expectation for the probability variation jackpot.

The manner of variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, and each symbol column The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, only the numbers may be variably displayed as symbols.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first winning opening 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. Suspended, the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, one reserved ball number pattern (a symbol of "○") is displayed for each reserved ball number, and depending on the displayed number of the reserved ball number symbols, it is reserved. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved sphere number symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere number symbols are displayed, it is reserved. Indicates that the number of spheres is 4. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The example of FIG. 4B shows an example in which two reserved sphere numbers are displayed, indicating that the number of reserved spheres is two.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first winning opening 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and is three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. However, the display may be performed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns). Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, a description will be given of a continuous notice effect which is one type of display effects in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The continuous announcement effect is an effect in which the announcement effect of the same system is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays. Whether or not this continuous advance notice effect is executable is determined when a new starting prize for the first entrance 64 is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved ball held at the time when the new starting winning is detected and the variable display based on the new starting winning. Although details will be described later, the determination rate of the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a new start winning lottery result being missed. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot.

5(a) and 5(b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a variable display executed based on other than the last held ball among the held balls for which continuous notice effects are set. is there. FIG. 5A shows a state in which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2 is changing. As shown in FIG. 5( a ), during execution of the continuous announcement effect, the upper symbols row Z1 and the lower symbols row Z3 are stopped and displayed as the third symbols having the same numbers. In the example of FIG. 5A, the main symbols with the number “3” are displayed in the middle of the upper symbol column Z1 and on the right side of the lower symbol column Z2, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, the main symbols to which the same numbers are attached are displayed in a mode in which the surroundings emit light (a mode different from the other third patterns). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the continuous announcement effect is being executed. Hereinafter, the aspect in which the periphery of the main symbol emits light will be referred to as an "aura aspect".

Then, as shown in FIG. 5B, during the execution of the continuous notice effect, even when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the main symbol to which the number “3” is attached in the middle symbol row Z2 is It will be stopped and displayed in a manner that includes the aura. As a result, it is possible to improve the expectation that the combination of the displayed symbols will be a big combination (because the reserved ball contains the lottery result corresponding to the big jackpot), even though the combination of symbols is a wrong combination. You can Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display mode when the last variable display in the continuous notice presentation is being executed. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed in the final variable display of the continuous notice effect, the same number is attached to any of the activated lines. The main symbols that have been displayed are stopped and displayed, and the main symbols with the same numbers are displayed in a mode in which the aura is put together. In the example of FIG. 6A, the main symbols with the number “3” are stopped and displayed on the activated line L4. The state in which the one symbol row (middle symbol row Z2) is changing, and the main symbol with the same number on the activated line is stopped and displayed is called the reach state. In the first embodiment, the reach state is always generated at the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect. That is, the start of the continuous announcement effect can be determined only when the new start winning is a lottery result corresponding to the variable display with the reach state. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that at least the reach state will occur after the continuous announcement effect is started, and thus, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved. it can.

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the reach state occurs, a horizontally elongated rectangular display region HR1 is formed in the upper right of the main display region Dm, and “reach!! Character is displayed. The display content of the display area HR1 allows the player to more easily understand that the reach state has occurred.

FIG. 6B shows an example of a display mode in which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in the final variable display of the continuous announcement effect, and the big hit is informed. When the jackpot is announced in the continuous announcement production, the main symbols with the same numbers as the main symbols that are aura-bearing, which are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, have already been displayed. It is stopped and displayed on the active line where the main symbols that are stopped and displayed are arranged. That is, the same number is attached, and the main symbols in the form of aura are aligned on one activated line. FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the main symbols with the number “3” are aligned on the activated line L4. By aligning the three main symbols with the same numbers on the activated line, it is possible to easily make the player understand that it has been a big hit. In the display area HR1 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, the character "Congratulations!!" is displayed to congratulate the big hit. This makes it possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the first embodiment, in each variable display in which the continuous notice effect is set, the main symbols that are stopped and displayed together with the aura are configured to have the same main symbols. There is. That is, in the first variation display of the continuous announcement effect, when the main symbol with the number “3” is stopped and displayed in the state where the aura is attached to each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the variation after the second time Even in the display, the three main symbols with the number "3" are stopped and displayed with the aura. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the manner of each variable display in one continuous notice presentation.

Although illustration is omitted, there are a plurality of notice effects executed in each variable display in which the continuous notice effect is set, in addition to the effect (stop notice effect A) in which the stop pattern is changed to an aura-like aspect. Exists. Specifically, when the fluctuation of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped, the effect that the main symbol with the same number is frozen (preliminary effect B) and the main symbol with the same number are struck by lightning. The effect (preliminary effect C) that is provided is provided at least as a type of continuous notification effect. The notice effect C is the type with the highest expectation of a big hit, and the notice effect A is the type with the lowest expectation of a big hit. Further, the degree of expectation of the notice effect B is set to be higher than that of the notice effect A and lower than that of the notice effect C. In this way, by varying the expectation of a jackpot depending on the type of continuous notice effect, the player can play the game while paying attention to the type of continuous notice effect as well.

Next, with reference to FIG. 7, a change with time of the presentation mode in the case where the continuous notice presentation is set will be described. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing how the effect mode changes over time when a new starting winning is detected and a continuous announcement effect is determined in the state where two reserved balls are present.

As shown in FIG. 7, if a starting winning (winning prize A in the upper left of FIG. 7) is detected during the execution of the normal variable display (that is, the continuous announcement effect is not set) in the state where there are two reserved balls. A determination is made as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined by the determination based on the prize A, the variable display based on the two holding balls that are held at that time and the variable display based on the prize A are continuously displayed over the variation time. Set to execute the notice production. More specifically, the value of the notice number counter 223i indicating the remaining number of continuous notice productions is set to 3, which is the number of executions of the continuous notice productions, and the determined type of the continuous notice productions (for the notice productions A to C). The value of the notice type flag 223k is updated according to any of the above. As a result, the continuous announcement effect is started from the next variation display (variation display based on the oldest holding ball held at the time when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined).

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, a state of prohibiting the continuous announcement effect lottery (hereinafter, referred to as an advance announcement lottery prohibition state) is set. This is to prevent (suppress) duplicate determination of the continuous announcement effect during execution of the continuous announcement effect. More specifically, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the detection of a new start winning even during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the type of the announcement effect during the continuous announcement effect is determined. There is a possibility of switching. For example, when a new start winning is detected to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect while the notice effect B is set and the execution of the notice effect A is decided, the notice effect B is set. May be discontinued, and there may be a switch from the next change to the notice effect A. That is, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed by switching from the performance type with relatively high expectations (preliminary effect B) to the performance type with low expectations (preliminary effect A). In addition, when a continuous announcement effect of the same effect type is newly decided during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effects are continuously displayed over the number of times of the number of holding balls held at the start of the continuous announcement effect. The notice production will be executed. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand which reserve ball should have a sense of expectation, and thus the meaning of the production may be difficult to understand.

In addition, as a method of solving these problems, it is allowed to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed only when the start winning corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect that is finally out. Also, a method may be considered in which the effect type of the continuous notice effect additionally determined is configured to have an expectation level equal to or higher than the effect type of the continuous notice effect being executed. However, in this case, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions each time a start winning is detected during execution of the continuous announcement effect, and to perform control processing for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the type of the announcement. However, there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, after the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, after the completion of the continuous announcement effect, one variable display (first detected in the announcement lottery prohibited state) It is configured such that it is prohibited to newly determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed until the end of the variable display based on the winning B). As a result, it is possible to prevent the production type from being switched during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, and to prevent the continuous announcement effect from continuing beyond the number of holding balls at the start of the continuous announcement effect. Further, at the time of starting winning, it is determined whether or not the notice lottery is prohibited (whether or not the notice effect prohibition flag 223h, which will be described later, is on). Since it suffices to perform a simple control of skipping the determination process of, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-mentioned notice lottery prohibition state is set while the variable display is being executed three times in which the continuous notice production is set. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, when the start winning is detected during execution of the second or third variable display of the continuous announcement effect, determination processing of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect for the starting prize. Is skipped. In addition, the advance notice lottery prohibition state continues during the execution period of the variable display executed for the first time after the end of the continuous advance notice production, and at the time when the first variable display ends after the end of the continuous advance notice production, the advance notice lottery The prohibited state is released. Therefore, if a new starting winning is detected during the execution of the first variable display after the continuous announcement effect is finished, the determination process of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect for the starting prize is performed in the continuous announcement effect. Skipped as if running. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect being started again immediately after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect being continued indefinitely. If, after the end of the continuous notice production, if the setting of the continuous notice production is allowed from the first variation display, the variation display based on the starting winning that triggered the execution of the first continuous notice production ends. Even after that, the presentation mode will be as if the continuous announcement production is continuing. In this case, there is a possibility that it is unclear to the player what the continuous announcement effect was started on, and there is a risk of misunderstanding the meaning of the continuous announcement effect. In other words, the continuous advance notice effect is not executed based on the lottery result (variation type) pre-read at the time of winning the start prize, but is an effect in which the effect mode is simply changed over a fixed number of variable displays. There is a risk of misunderstanding. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, after the continuous announcement effect is finished, at least one variable display can be executed in a normal mode (a mode not accompanied by the announcement effect). It is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the game has ended. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand how many times the variation display (the number of the reserved balls) to be performed should have an expectation during the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the lottery results of all the reserved balls held at that time are determined, and the determination result Based on the above, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Although the details of the determination method will be described later, by determining whether or not the continuous notice production can be performed by taking into consideration the lottery results of all the reserved balls, despite the fact that the reserved balls having a higher degree of expectation are reserved, It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low expectation.

In other words, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in order from the oldest holding ball with the timing when the start winning is detected, the continuous announcement effect without determining the new new pending ball with respect to time. May be decided. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous announcement effect has been decided is a lottery result with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a reserved ball that is out after normal reach), and the degree of expectation is higher in the reserved balls that are new in time. When a high-hold ball (for example, a hold ball that becomes a big hit when a super-reach occurs) is included, despite the continuous notice effect being set for the low-hold ball, the expectation level is set. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the continuous announcement effect is not set for a high holding ball. Therefore, there is a possibility that the sense of expectation for the continuous notice presentation may be impaired.

On the other hand, if the timing of detecting the start winning is determined as to whether or not the continuous notice production can be executed in order from the new hold ball in terms of time, the continuous notice can be made without determining the old hold ball in time. The performance may be decided. In this case, the reserved ball for which the continuous announcement effect has been decided is a lottery result with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a reserved ball that is missed after normal reach), and the expected degree is among the reserved balls that are old in time. If a high holding ball (for example, a holding ball that becomes a big hit when a super-reach occurs) is included, the continuous announcement production does not end with the holding ball with a high expectation that is executed first, Continuous notice production continues until the variable display based on the low hold ball. That is, there is a possibility that the player may have the impression that the continuous notice production has become a buttock.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, when the notice lottery prohibited state is released, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed by taking into consideration the lottery results of all the reserve balls. It is possible to set continuous notice production that continues until the lottery result with the highest expectations. Therefore, a situation in which a continuous announcement effect is set for a holding ball with a low degree of expectation but a continuous announcement effect is not set for a holding ball with a high degree of expectation, or a hold with a high degree of expectation during the continuous announcement effect It is possible to prevent the situation in which the ball is consumed and the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation is consumed at the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set from the time when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined to the time when the first variable display ends after the end of the continuous advance notice effect. However, it is not limited to this. The condition for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set arbitrarily, and for example, the number of times of variable display in which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set may be increased (for example, 5 times). With such a configuration, more variable display of a normal mode (a mode not accompanied by the notice effect) is performed from the time when one consecutive notice effect is finished to the time when the next notice effect is started. Since it can be executed, it is possible to more surely let the player recognize whether or not one continuous notice effect has been completed. Further, as the number of variable displays for which the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set is increased, the chance of determining the continuous advance notice effect decreases, so that the rarity of the continuous advance notice effect can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that he or she has been able to see an unusual effect just by starting the continuous notice effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the condition for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibition state is defined by the number of times of variable display (after the end of the continuous advance notice production, until the end of one variable display). The number of times of variable display is not necessarily limited. For example, the cancellation condition may be determined based on the elapsed time after the end of the continuous announcement presentation. More specifically, the configuration may be such that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the continuous advance notice production has ended. With this configuration, even if there is a player who has finished playing with the end of the continuous notice production, if the next player has started playing after a predetermined period of time, the notice lottery prohibited state will be canceled. A game can be played in the state where it is being played. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the succeeding player starts the game from the advance notice lottery prohibited state, and thus it is possible to further enjoy the continuous advance notice production.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set until the end of one continuous variable display after the end of the continuous advance notice production. It may be configured to cancel the lottery prohibition state. In this case, it may be configured so that the player can easily discriminate whether or not it is the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect from the effect mode. With this configuration, it is possible to further shorten the period in which the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set, and thus it is possible to further increase the chances of executing the continuous advance notice effect. In addition, as a specific example of an effect mode indicating whether or not the last changeable display of the continuous notice effect is performed, for example, a configuration in which the remaining number of changes of the continuous notice effect is displayed in a countdown manner may be used. In addition, a display indicating the end (for example, the character “end”) may be displayed in the last variable display, or the same song may be continuously played during the continuous notice presentation. The music may be stopped at the timing at which the last variable display in is ended. Further, during execution of the continuous notice effect, the reach state may not be generated in the third symbol display device 81 in the variable displays other than the last variable display. That is, while the continuous announcement effect is being executed, the reach state may be displayed to suggest that it is the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed with the game ball passing through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 is for a predetermined time only. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, a game ball can easily enter the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. It Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the game ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, and is not more than 3 times or not less than 5 times. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not be lit.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a game ball can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first ball inlet switch. By the main controller 110, a special symbol is selected by lottery, and a display corresponding to the result of the lottery is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes from which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after the predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (16 rounds of big hits) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state where the game ball cannot win or is hard to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to incline the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the game ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is performed. A special gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the game ball is won into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed as.

Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp etc. affixed to the adhesive space K1 is the front frame 14 It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. The game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is a unit in which a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114) are mounted. The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as required.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Be cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out game balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). I have it. The game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the required number of game balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 8). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 9A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per random number counter C1, but the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a. When it matches with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 9B) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the jackpot type. Is specified in association with. Specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined to be associated with the big hit A in the range of "0 to 49" (see 202b1 of FIG. 9B). Further, the big hit B is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b2 in FIG. 9B). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 9(c)) is a data table in which normal symbol hit determination values are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is defined as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 9C). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is acquired based on the fact that the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, and the second per random number table 202c, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In the main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 11, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used in the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which each time it is updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 29). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball entrance. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored at the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a game ball. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing when the ball passes through either the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol is held in the RAM 203 at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first per random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of a low probability state of a special symbol), and a high probability of a high probability of a special symbol jackpot than that low probability (special It is divided into two types, one for a high probability state of the symbol) and the other, and the number of random numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between the low probability of the special symbol and the high probability of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, when the special symbol is in the probability changing state, it is determined in the special symbol lottery whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9", and "0 to 0" is determined. If any of "9", it is determined that it is a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 are "0 to 399", the determination value that is a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9", so it is a big hit of the special symbol during the probability change of the special symbol. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). In the case of the low probability state of the special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. The possible value of the first random number counter C1 is 400 from "0 to 399", and since the judgment value that is a big hit is only "0", the special symbol is in a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of a big hit is 1/400.

In the present embodiment, a big hit random number value stored in the first hit random number table for low probability and a big hit random value value stored in the first hit random number table for high probability. Then, the random numbers that are big jackpots are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, there is a possibility that the random number value is input from the outside and the jackpot is likely to be illegally assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 at the timing when the game ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 9B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is “big hit A” when the random number value is “0 to 49” (FIG. 9). See 202b1 in (b)). Further, when the value is “50 to 99”, the jackpot type is “jackpot B” (see 202b2 in FIG. 9C). As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. ..

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (eg 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), a random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that a range of random values corresponding to the “completely out” stop type is 0 to 89 and a wide range table for high probability is used so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "rearward/rearward reach" is narrowed to 98,99, and the "reach other than front/rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear/rear outreach" or "reach other than front/rear outreach". In addition, in the low probability state, the low probability that the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the game ball to enter the first entrance 64. The hour table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

In this stop type selection table, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front/rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure the entering time of the game ball into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be carried out. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-position reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 29) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is, as described above, stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

Here, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10A, the variation pattern selection table 202d includes a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 10B) and a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 (see FIG. 10C). ) And a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (see FIG. 10D) are set at least.

First, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG.10(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of this jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern to be selected is defined when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot. As a variation pattern of the jackpot, various types of normal reach (30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and special reach (90 seconds) are specified. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, as the judgment value of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the range of "0 to 50" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reach (30 seconds), and the range of "51 to 179" is various super reach. The variation patterns of (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and the variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". MPU201 of the main controller 110, when selecting the variation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern in which the determination value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 that has been acquired is set. It is selected from the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern that is selected when the special symbol lottery result is off in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. .. When the lottery result of the special symbol is out, as described above, whether the stop type is completely out of reach (non-reach) or out of reach (common to reach) from the stop type selection table (not shown) It is determined by the value of the selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79" in the low probability state of the special symbol, complete disconnection is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", release reach is set. Set (reach out of front and back, reach other than out of front and back).

If the variation pattern type is complete deviation, either a short deviation (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long deviation (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. "0-98" is set for the short deviation (7 seconds) and "99-198" is set for the long deviation (10 seconds) as the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In addition, with respect to the out-reach, various normal reach (30 seconds) out of the range of the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 being “0 to 149”, and various super reach various out of the range of “150 to 197”. (60 seconds), "198" is set to various special reach (90 seconds).

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when the special symbol lottery result is out of the normal gaming state, the stop type is determined, and the variation acquired from the out-of-regular (normal) variation pattern table 202d2. A variation pattern is selected from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 based on the value of the type counter CS1.

FIG. 10D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3. This deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 is a data table in which the type (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the special symbol lottery is missed in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined. In the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3, the set value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above.

As described above, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of “0 to 89” by the stop type selection table (not shown), complete disconnection is determined. , "90-99", the out-reach (rear out-of-front-reach, reach other than out-of-rear) is determined.

In this way, when the probability variation game state is higher than the normal game state, the probability of reaching when it is out of the normal is set to be low. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time of the deviation from increasing at the time of the probability change and the increase of the period until the big hit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game is lengthened during the probability variation game state where it is easy to hit the jackpot, and the player feels bored.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The second per random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the right or left normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of being performed and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 9C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the winning set by the second hit random number table, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol. In addition, this second per random number table, for low probability of normal symbols (the period in which the normal state of normal symbols), and high probability of high probability of hitting normal symbols than the low probability (normal symbols) It is divided into two types, that is, for a period of time saving state), and the number of big numbers included in each of them is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

As described above with reference to FIG. 9C, at the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the symbols of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5-28” (FIG. 9C ) 202c1)). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability of the normal symbol, when the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds×2 times” may be set.

On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random number values that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5 to 204" (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C). These random number values are stored in the second random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the gaming ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”. In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and further the first entrance 64 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the game ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second×2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 29).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 11, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

It should be noted that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power cutoff (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 29) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 28). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 27) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 8, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and a probability change flag. It has at least 203e and the time saving medium counter 203f.

The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the game ball wins (start winning) the first ball entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas from the first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the prize that is older in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, the data that corresponds to the prize that is older in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is made.

When the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (the second holding area to the fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and as soon as each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the start prize, the original special symbol big hit. Apart from the lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit/miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp controlling device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a. Further, if it is not in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed based on various information notified by the winning information command.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through either the normal entrance 67 on either side, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having an area number that is smaller by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first inlet 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. This special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the initial value is set to zero, each time the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 One is added (see S404 in FIG. 24). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 22).

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 22, see S405 of FIG. 24). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp controller 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls to be held based on the number of balls to be held, and displays the number of balls to hold to the display controller 114 each time the number of balls to hold is changed. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved sphere number symbol in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball in the normal ball entrance 67 It is a counter that counts up to four times. This normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the game ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the number of spheres of variable display increases, add 1 to the maximum value 4 (See S604 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 25).

When the game ball passes through either the right or left normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per second The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S605 in FIG. 26). On the other hand, when the game ball passes through either of the left and right normal ball entrances 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not performed (S603: No in FIG. 26).

The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of a special symbol (a high probability state of a special symbol). If the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is special. It shows that the symbol is in the probability variation state, and if the value of the probability variation flag 203e is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state of the special symbol). The probability variation flag 203e is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery for special symbols, it is set to OFF when the start of the big hit is set (see S213 in FIG. 22).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery for special symbols is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203e is referenced, and if the state is ON, based on the first random number table for high probability time, the special symbol lottery is performed, while the probability variation flag 203e is in the state. If is off, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the first random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 23).

The time saving medium counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. In this time saving counter 203f, the initial value is set to zero, the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, and every time the jackpot B is reached, the value is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot B. (See S1013 in FIG. 30). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if a jackpot is obtained by a lottery for special symbols, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the jackpot.

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is carried out, the value of the hour/shortness medium counter 203f and the state of the probability variation flag 203e are referred to, and the value of the hour/shortness medium counter 203f is 1 or more, or the state of the probability variation flag 203e is turned on. If so, it is determined that the normal design is time saving. In this case, the lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the second winning random number table for high probability (see S509 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, and the state of the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol, based on the second random number table for low probability time, A lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S510 in FIG. 25).

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a. The MPU 201 receives various commands and controls via the input/output port 205. Send a signal.

Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Based on the signal for resetting the RAM or the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the game ball is set according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 when the instruction to launch the game ball is given by the main control device 110. is there. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is turned off (not operated) as a condition. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

Here, the details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 13. First, FIG. 12A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 12A, the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and a notice selection table 222b.

The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to specify a detailed display mode of the fluctuation effect based on the rough display mode (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation effect selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d in the main controller 110. To be More specifically, when the variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by the main control device 110 is received, the notice effect setting process which is one of the variation display setting process (see FIG. 36). In FIG. 37, one variation pattern (detailed display mode of variation effect) is determined (specified) from the variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table 222a (see S4603 and S4605 in FIG. 37). The variation pattern defined in the variation pattern table 222a defines the presence/absence of the notice effect and the information including the type of the notice effect.

The notice selection table 222b is a data table that is referred to when determining whether or not continuous notice effects can be executed. Details of the notice selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the notice selection table 222b.

As shown in FIG. 13, the notice selection table 222b is a data table that defines, for each variation type, a range of random number values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) for which each of the notice effects A to C is determined. When determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223f belongs to any of the ranges of the random number values (values of the effect lottery counter 223f) associated with each of the announcement effects. The execution of the continuous announcement effect of the effect type associated with the range is determined. On the other hand, if the value of the effect lottery counter 223f does not belong to any random number range defined in the advance notification selection table 222b, it is determined not to execute the continuous advance effect.

In this notice selection table 222b, six types of fluctuation types are defined: per special reach, per super reach, per normal reach, out of special reach, out of super reach, and out of normal reach. Other types of fluctuation (long deviation, short deviation) are not defined, and thus are not subject to execution of continuous notice production. By limiting the target on which the continuous announcement effect can be executed to the variation type in which the reach state occurs, it is guaranteed that at least the reach state is developed at the time when the continuous announcement effect is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per special reach, the “notice effect A” is associated with the range of 10 random number values “0 to 9” (value of the effect lottery counter 223f). It is defined that the "notice production B" is defined in association with the range of 35 random number values (value of the production lottery counter 223f) of "10 to 44", and 15 random number values of "45 to 59". “Advance notice effect C” is defined in association with the range of (value of effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b1 in FIG. 13). Since the effect lottery counter 223f is updated within a range of 100 values of "0 to 99", when the variation type is per special reach, the rate at which the "notice effect A" is determined is 10% (10/ 100), the proportion for which the "notice effect B" is determined is 35% (35/100), and the proportion for which the "notice effect C" is determined is 15% (15/100). Further, the ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 40% (40/100).

As shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per super reach, the “notice production A” corresponds to the range of 10 random number values “0 to 9” (value of the production lottery counter 223f). It is defined in addition to the range of 30 random number values "10 to 39" (value of the effect lottery counter 223f), and "notice effect B" is defined in association with the range of 10 "40 to 49". The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b2 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per super reach, the proportion of the “notice effect A” determined is 10% (10/100), and the proportion of the “notice effect B” determined is 30% (30/100). ), and the rate at which “advance notice effect C” is determined is 10% (10/100). In addition, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 50% (50/100). That is, the ratio of determining the continuous announcement effect is lower than that in the case of the special reach. Further, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the notice effect A is determined to be higher than that per special reach, while the notice effect C is determined to be lower.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is per normal reach, “notice production A” is associated with a range of 10 random number values (value of production lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 9”. Is defined as "10 to 24" and the range of 15 random number values (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) is defined in association with "notice effect B", and 5 random numbers of "25 to 29" are specified. The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range of the numerical value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b3 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is per normal reach, the ratio of "notice effect A" determined is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of "notice effect B" determined is 15% (15/100). The ratio at which the “notice effect C” is determined is 5% (5/100). Further, the ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 70% (70/100). That is, the rate of determining the continuous announcement effect is lower than that in the case of the special reach or the super reach. Further, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the ratio of the notice effect A determined is higher than that of the special reach or the super reach, while the ratio of the notice effect C determined is low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of special reach, the “notice production A” corresponds to the range of 10 random number values (values of the production lottery counter 223f) of “0 to 9”. It is defined in addition to the range of eight random number values of "10 to 17" (value of the effect lottery counter 223f), and "Notification effect B" is defined in association with each other, and two values of "18, 19" are specified. The "notice effect C" is defined in association with the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) (see 222b4 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of special reach, the ratio of “advance notice effect A” is 10% (10/100), and the ratio of “advance notice effect B” is 8% (8/100). ), and the rate at which the “advance notice effect C” is determined is 2% (2/100). The ratio at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 80% (80/100). That is, the rate of determining the continuous announcement effect is lower than that in the case of the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach. Further, in the case where the continuous notice production is executed, the ratio of the notice production A determined is higher than that of the special reach, the super reach, and the normal reach, while the proportion of the notice productions B and C determined is low. Become.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of super reach, the “notice production A” corresponds to the range of the nine random number values “0 to 8” (value of the production lottery counter 223f). In addition, the "notice effect B" is defined in association with one random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) "9" (see 222b5 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of super reach, the percentage of the “notice effect A” is 9% (9/100), and the percentage of the “notice effect B” is 1% (1/100). ), there is no possibility that the “notice effect C” will be determined. Further, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 90% (90/100). That is, the ratio of determining the continuous announcement effect is lower than in the case of per special reach, per super reach, per normal reach, and out of special reach. Further, in the case where the continuous notice effect is executed, the proportion of the notice effect A determined is higher than that for the special reach, the super reach, the normal reach, and the missed special reach, while the notice effect B is determined. The ratio becomes low. In addition, the notice effect C has a zero possibility of being determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation type is out of normal reach, the “notice production A” is associated with the range of the five random number values “0 to 4” (the value of the production lottery counter 223f). (See 222b6 in FIG. 13). Therefore, when the variation type is out of special reach, the proportion of the “notice effect A” determined is 5% (5/100), but there is no possibility that the notice effects B and C will be determined. Further, the rate at which the continuous announcement effect is not determined is 95% (95/100). That is, the rate of determining the continuous announcement effect is lower than that of the other variation types that are the determination targets of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Further, when the continuous notice effect is executed, the probability that the notice effect A is determined is higher than that of the other variation types, while the possibility that the notice effects B and C are determined becomes 0.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the ratio of determining the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of a big hit. In addition, the variation type having a high expectation (long variation time) is configured such that the rate of determining the continuous notice presentation is higher than the variation type having a low expectation (short variation time). As a result, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is started.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variation type having a higher expectation degree has a lower rate of determining the notice effect A than the variation type having a lower expectation degree, and the rate of determining the notice effect C. Is configured to be high. Therefore, when the notice production C is started, the player can be strongly expected to be a big hit, while when the notice production A is started, the last fluctuation of the continuous notice production is performed. You can watch the production with a sense of tension even to the display. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the type of notice production.

Further, since the notice effect B is configured so that it is not selected (decided) if the normal reach is out of the reach, at the time when the notice effect B is started, it will be developed into super reach or higher (out of the super reach, out of the special reach) or a big hit. It is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot. Further, since the notice effect C is configured not to be selected (determined) in the normal reach out and the super reach out, it is determined that the notice reach C will be a special reach or a big hit when the notice effect C is started. Therefore, when the notice production C is started, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for a big hit.

Next, details of the RAM 223 included in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the RAM 223.

As shown in FIG. 12B, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a variation. The time counter 223e, the effect lottery counter 223f, the game state storage area 223g, the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h, the advance notice number counter 223i, the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j, the advance notice type flag 223k, and the other memory area 223z. At least provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning, each value of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning. From the, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Memorized in. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area. In other words, the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a are respectively stored in the reserved first area to the fourth area in the special symbol reserved sphere storing area 203a of the main controller 110. The data corresponding to the lottery result based on the value is stored.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when various information based on a new start winning is notified by the winning information command, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed based on the various information. That is, based on the notified various information and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect and the effect type of the continuous notice effect are determined with reference to the notice selection table 222b described above. By executing the continuous notice production, the expectation for the jackpot can be made to persist over a plurality of times of variable display, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as described above, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the announcement lottery prohibition state that prohibits the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is set. Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state ends, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, based on the information stored in all the winning information storage areas 223a. Further, when the continuous notice effect is executed, a determination is also made as to which holding ball the continuous notice effect is to be continued. A method of determining whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect, which is executed based on the end of the notice lottery prohibited state, will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining a part of the control processing executed by referring to the information in each area of the winning information storage area 223a when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is ended (released). As indicated by the broken lines in the horizontally long rectangular shape in FIG. 14, each area of the winning information storage area 223a is configured to be able to store 1 byte (8 bits) of data. As shown in FIG. 14, the variation type is associated with each bit of the 1-byte data, and the ON bit indicates the variation type of the winning information stored in the area. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14, in order from the upper bits, “per special reach”, “per super reach”, “normal reach”, “special reach off”, “super reach off”, “normal reach off”. ], “long deviation”, and “short deviation” are associated with each other. In the example shown in FIG. 14, since the second bit of the reserved first area is 1 (on) and the other bits are off, the “long deviation” associated with the second bit is the reserved first area. The lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data stored in the area is obtained. Similarly, in the reserved second area of the winning information storage area 223a, the fifth bit associated with "missing special reach" is set to 1 (ON), so the lottery indicated by the data in the reserved second area. The result (variation type) is “out of special reach”. Similarly, the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data of the hold second area is “short deviation”, and the lottery result (variation type) indicated by the data of the hold third area is “per super reach”. Since the data in the execution area is not used in this control, the illustration is omitted.

When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, as shown in FIG. 14, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each holding area other than the holding first area among the holding areas is calculated. The logical sum is a logic that is true (1) if at least one of the plurality of data is true (1) and false (0) if all of the plurality of data are false (0). It is an operation. In the example of FIG. 14, the data “010100” is generated (calculated) as the logical sum of the upper 6 bits. The reserved first area is excluded because the continuous announcement effect in the first embodiment is configured to be executed at least twice for the variable display. In other words, if the holding first area is set as the target for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, the continuous announcement effect may be set for only one variable display based on the data of the holding first area. Therefore, the purpose is to prevent (suppress) this.

In the first embodiment, of the data stored in the respective holding areas of the winning information storage area 223a based on the generated logical sum data, the highest expectation level (priority level for determining whether or not continuous notice effect can be executed). Identify the data that corresponds to the high retention ball. More specifically, since the logical sum data indicates that the higher the bit is, the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is. Therefore, whether there is an ON (1) bit in the logical sum data. Whether or not the upper bit side is determined, and when an ON bit is detected, based on the variation type corresponding to the bit, execution of continuous notice production is performed from the notice selection table 222b and the value of the production lottery counter 223f. Execute a lottery for acceptance. When it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the holding area in which the bit corresponding to the same degree of expectation (variation type) as the ON (1) bit of the OR data is ON (1) is searched. Then, a continuous notice effect is set to continue up to the holding ball corresponding to the holding area in which the same bit as the logical sum data is turned on.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the logical sum data is generated based on the data of all the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is generated. Based on this, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed after checking the details of the data of all the holding areas. it can. More specifically, for example, in the case where all the reserved balls are out-of-long or out-of-short (that is, a lottery result which is not a target of determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect), the first logical Since all the bits of the sum data become 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the method in which each bit of all the reserved areas is determined one by one. Further, for example, even when there are a plurality of holding balls that are the targets for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, if the determination is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit in which 1 data is set is determined. Thus, it is possible to easily specify the variation type having the highest expectation (priority for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect) in the hold. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining each bit of all the reserved areas and identifying the variation type having the highest expectation among the plurality of variation types that are the determination targets of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol holding number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. Is becoming

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, and the special The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S4208 in FIG. 33). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4202 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4502 in FIG. 36). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (see S4102 of FIG. 32) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S4205 in FIG. 33), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S4508 in FIG. 36). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command (see S4510 in FIG. 36).

The fluctuation time counter 223e is a counter for counting the fluctuation time. This fluctuation time counter is set with a fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation display, and is updated, for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 32) is executed. To be done. By the fluctuation time counter 223e, the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the special symbol executed in the main control device 110 can be accurately grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol in the first display device 37 and the variation time of the variable display of the third symbol executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be matched.

The production lottery counter 223f is a counter used for lottery of production modes such as determination (lottery) as to whether or not continuous notice production can be executed. This production lottery counter 223f. The value is updated in the range of "0 to 99". When the continuous notice effect is drawn, the notice type corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is referred to from the notice selection table 222b to determine the continuous notice effect.

The gaming state storage area 223g is a storage area for storing data according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. This game state storage area 223g is updated each time it receives a state command output from the main control device 110 each time the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed (see S4210 in FIG. 33). The game state storage area 223g is composed of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and the game state can be specified by the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, whether or not the least significant bit is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether the bit of the second lower bit is the probability variation state of the special symbol is indicated. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223g.

The advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. When the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is turned on, it means that the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set. On the other hand, if the notice production prohibition flag 223h is off, it means that the notice lottery is not prohibited. While the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is ON, the determination (lottery) as to whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect is prohibited. The advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON when the determination (lottery) as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is won (see S4311 in FIG. 34 and S4415 in FIG. 35). Further, the notice effect inhibition flag 223h is set to OFF when the normal (that is, without the notice effect) variable display that is executed for the first time after the end of the continuous notice effect stops changing (S4402 in FIG. 35). reference).

The notice number counter 223i is a counter for counting the number of remaining variable displays in the continuous notice effect. This notice number counter 223i is set to a value corresponding to the number of consecutive notice effects to be executed when execution of the notice effect is determined (see S4310 in FIG. 34 and S4414 in FIG. 35). Further, while the value of the advance notice number counter 223i is 1 or more, the value is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is newly started (see S4604 in FIG. 37).

The notice prohibition release flag 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the first variable display is being executed after the continuous notice effect is finished. That is, it is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibited state after the change is being executed. If the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is ON, it means that the first variable display is being executed after the continuous advance notice effect is finished, and if it is OFF, it is the first time after the continuous advance notice effect is finished. It means that it is in a state other than the variable display of. The advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON at the start of the first variable display after the end of the continuous advance notice production (see S4607 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to OFF when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released (see S4402 in FIG. 35).

The advance notice type flag 223k is a flag indicating the production type of the continuous advance notice production, and is allocated with, for example, a 3-bit storage area. The 1st bit corresponds to the notice effect A, the 2nd bit corresponds to the notice effect B, and the 3rd bit corresponds to the notice effect C, indicating that the notice effect corresponding to the ON (1) bit is set. When all the bits are off (0), it means that the continuous announcement effect is not set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 33) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) and continuous notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline thereof, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors and the like, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 27).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a model displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND type flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be set within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c or less, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. A fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 38) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of the frames of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction, so that the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, a NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of a ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 issues an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction and transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored at the storage source start address and the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

The image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the mouth 640 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 38).

Here, referring to FIG. 16, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. FIG. 16 shows that the display controller 114, immediately after the power is turned on, is turned on while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 while being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of a “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” is displayed as shown in FIG. 16C. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 16(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is “a deviation of the special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. 16(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, an image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 16B and 16C alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect by using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on When a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the device 81 immediately.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of rear images and the range of the rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. FIG. 17B shows a back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and a back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

As shown in FIG. 17, the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A and B are prepared in the character ROM 234 as images that are horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, and then the image between the positions a and a′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scroll-displayed by such connection.

When the change of the rear surface type is decided and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the area between the position a and the position a′ of the corresponding rear surface image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further the display is performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow leftward.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the initial stage "Sand beach stage". By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17B, the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a partial area of the back surface, that is, image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ (or the range shown in FIGS. 17A to 17B). ), and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b (or the image between FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B) including the initial position is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, when the change of the stage is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, it is possible to immediately display the initial position of the back surface B on the third symbol display device 81, and while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Can be displayed. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

After the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface B, the range from position a to position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while the operation is being performed. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back side B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 15) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back-side image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back-side image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back-side image can be displayed reliably.

Further, in the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “1” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 can be used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37, even though the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the main symbols to which the numbers "1" to "9" are not attached are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e. Thus, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the symbol area 235e, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message in the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for the previously developed one frame is read out from the other frame buffer, and to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which the display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are displayed for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table, and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of the various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is jackpot A, big hit B If any of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is repeatedly opened. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is a main symbol without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the rear surface image, the display position is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information and the filter designation information, with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image. This back surface type displays either the back surface A or B corresponding to the stage (either the "sand beach stage" or the "deep sea stage") selected by the player, or the back surface different from the back surface A or B. Information that specifies whether to display an image is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed.

When it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by the lottery among the back surfaces A and B as a drawing target, Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A and B, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, what range of the back side type and the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be one of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time but may be the information indicating the address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

As for the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each of the third symbols, the variation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbols. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information by managing the offset information with the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, and the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the 3rd symbol is displayed at high speed, the 3rd symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images is limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at a time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 19). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address "0002H" in FIG. 19).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

It should be noted that, as with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 19, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 20) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is used after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , Is set to ON in the main process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 38) (see S6005 in FIG. 38). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S7605 in FIG. 49B).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 40B), and If the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 40B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 40B) are displayed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 40(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 and the like. Processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 49A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) in which the content of the image drawing instruction for the is described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 20) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. ) In S6303), the pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 46) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time such updating of the pointer 233f is performed, and the drawing list to be described later. (Refer to FIG. 20), the transfer data table stores the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 20, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of reserved balls, symbol 1, number of reserved balls, 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of a corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. In addition, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information designated by the filter designation information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image for one frame is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character The detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter for counting the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 of FIG. 46). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 50). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 50). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "ON", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 51).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 40B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 to 30. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is regularly started (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and first. A start winning process associated with a prize (starting prize) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage along with the passage of the game ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. After the through gate passage process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, so that the gaming ball This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, a special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is ended as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0. (S204: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S210), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S211). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and if the special symbol is a big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the big hit is A or the big hit B.

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. If it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. It should be noted that although the display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

After the processing of S211, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S212). If the result of the lottery this time is a big hit for the special symbol (S212: Yes), the probability variation flag 203e is reset to OFF, the value of the hour/medium-time counter 203f is reset to 0 (S213), and the big hit start is set. (S214), the process proceeds to S217. When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S214, when the jackpot control process (S904) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed, the process branches to S1001: Yes, and the opening command is set. To be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit effect is started.

In the process of S212, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S212: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S215), If the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S215: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S216), and the process proceeds to S217. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0 (S215: No), the process of S216 is skipped and the process proceeds to S217. In the process of S217, a stop command indicating the variation stop of the special symbol is set (S217), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment judgment), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of a fluctuating effect that is referred to.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a are acquired. Yes (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol is currently in the probability variation state (whether the probability variation flag 203e of the RAM 203 is on) (S302). The probability variation flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203e is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the probability variation If the flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state).

When it is determined that the special symbol is in the probability variation state (the probability variation flag 203e is on) (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the first per random number acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first winning random number table for high probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in the probability variation state (the probability variation flag 203e is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (low probability state). , Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table for low probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "0" is set as a random number value for the special symbol jackpot, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "0", it is determined that the special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether or not it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table, and the special symbols of two types are special jackpots (the jackpot A , Jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 49”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R probability variation big hit) (see 202b1 of FIG. 9B) and “50”. If it is in the range of "~99", it is determined that it is a big hit B (16R hour short time big hit) (see 202b2 in FIG. 9B).

In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10) as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviating symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or the complete outreach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability are compared. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", the complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", the reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variable time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the specified content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 10), the normal reach, Decide the variation time of symbol variation such as super reach. When the process of S309 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, which is executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). ). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 29). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. The processing for holding the value indicated by the various random number counters and the prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S401). Here, the entry (winning) into the first entry port 64 is detected over three times of the timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (prize) (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (the number N of times of variable display holding in the special symbol) is changed. It is acquired (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After the number of reserved balls command is set by the processing of S405, after the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the above-described timer interrupt process. Each value of is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, the winning/non-winning of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a jackpot), its stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and its variation pattern are predicted. Yes (S407).

By the processing of S407, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is predicted and the predicted stop type, The winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and this processing ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/disapproval, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 64a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S501). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is made while the second symbol display device 83 displays the hit. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S501: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S504: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S504: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508). Specifically, the value of the time saving medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203e is on, it is determined that the normal symbol is a time saving state, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203f is 0, If the probability variation flag 203e is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not the time saving state).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S508: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S507 and the second per random number table for high probability Based on the result, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S509). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Normally it is determined that the design is off (see 202c2 in FIG. 9C).

On the other hand, in the process of S508, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S508: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507 and the second hit for the low probability time. Based on the random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", Normally it is determined that the symbol is off (see 202c1 in FIG. 9C).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S509 or S510 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S511), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S511: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol "○" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of place (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out of position is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S514), and if the time saving state of the normal symbol is (S514: Yes), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to 3 seconds (S515), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), this process To finish. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", so it is normal The lottery frequency of the symbols becomes high. Therefore, since the winning frequency in the lottery of the normal symbol becomes high, the electric accessory 64a associated with the first ball inlet 64 is easily opened, and the game ball enters the first ball inlet 64. It will be in an easy state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S517). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S517: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S518, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the display is finished, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S519). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S519: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S520), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state. (S520: Yes), “1 second×2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. .. On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state (not the time saving state) (S520: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times of opening. As a result, “0.2 seconds×1 time” is set (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 is set (S523), and the present process is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 29) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the result of the current lottery is out of the normal symbols (S519: No), the processes of S520 to S523 are skipped and the present process is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 21), and it is determined whether or not the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball passes. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the game ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired (S602). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d ( If M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, the game ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S603: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S605), and this processing ends. In the process of S605, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S801). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S814 also in this case.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut down, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S814. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S814, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S814). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S815, S816) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S815, S816) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S815, S816) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S815, S816), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S815), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S816). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the information on occurrence of power failure is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S807: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S808). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state at the time of cutting off the drive power is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the probability variation flag 203e and the value of the hour/hour counter 203f are read (S811), and a state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state indicated by each read value is set (S812). The status command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the status command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the data in the gaming status storage area 223g of the RAM 223 according to the gaming status indicated by the status command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can be made to grasp an accurate game state immediately after the power is turned on. After the process of S812 is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S813), and the process proceeds to the main process described later. The state command is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and the game state can be notified by the lower 2 bits of data. That is, the least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not it is in a time saving state, and if the least significant bit is on, it indicates that the current time is a normal symbol in a time saving state. On the other hand, if the least significant bit is off, it indicates that the current state is normal for normal symbols. Further, it is a bit indicating whether or not the data of the lower 2nd bit is in the probability changing state, and if the lower 2nd bit is on, it indicates that the current state is the probability changing state of the special symbol. On the other hand, if the lower 2nd bit is off, it indicates that the special symbol is currently in a low probability state. By determining whether each bit of the state command is on or off, the game state can be easily identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S901 to S907 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S901). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 21) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) and the start winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, in the case of launching a game ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S905). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors product 64a is set by the process of S523 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the opening/closing control of the electric auditors product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or the processing of S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses after the change is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can check the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) ends, the first symbol display device In the display mode set by the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23) or the process of S308, the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, the second symbol display updating process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variable time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), in the second symbol display device 83. Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the variable display that is normal, in the display mode set by the process of S512 or S513 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed from the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S908, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 27 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S912 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S912), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S913). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S908 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S801 in FIG. 28) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S904). This jackpot control processing (S904) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 29), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is started (S1001: Yes), the opening command is set (S1002), and the present process is ended.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1003). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing a big jackpot of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1003: No), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol is a big hit (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1004). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the newly started round number is set (S1006). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1004, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, the game ball is predetermined. When a number (for example, 10) is won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S1007, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that it is the ending effect start timing.

In the process of S1009, if it is the ending effect start timing (S1009: Yes), the ending command is set (S1010), and the present process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1009, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011), and it is determined that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect. If so (S1011: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1011 that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of this time is the jackpot A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, when it is determined that it is not the big hit A (that is, it is the big hit B) (S1012: No), by overwriting the value of the hour saving medium counter 203f with 100, 100 times of the normal symbol after the big hit ends. The setting is made so that the time saving period is given (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, when it is determined that the big hit of this time is the big hit A (S1012: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned on so that the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the end of the big hit. (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1013, or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the special symbol lottery state after the jackpot is over (whether the special symbol is a probability changing state or a low probability state of the special symbol) is voiced. The state command for notifying the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the big hit is set (S1016), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 37. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S4116 (see FIG. 32) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S4113: Yes in FIG. 32), the power-off process of S4116 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

In the process of S4002, if the power-off process flag is off (S4002: No), the startup process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs. It is started after completing the execution of the power-off process in S4116, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power-off command from the main controller 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-on process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4116, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4116 is executed (see S4115 of FIG. 32). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4116 is executed. Therefore, the process of S4008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the start-up process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state where the execution of the power-off processing in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The game state at power-on indicated by the state command output in the startup process (see FIG. 28) of the control device 110 is analyzed (S4011), and the game state is stored according to the game state notified by the state command. The data in the area 223g is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S4004 to S4006 is performed and then S4008 is executed. This is the case where the processing is started or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), after skipping S4009 which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, the process proceeds to S4010, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the main controller 110 is executed. The game state at power-on indicated by the state command output in the startup process (see FIG. 28) is analyzed (S4011), and the game state storage area 223g of the game state storage area 223g is displayed according to the game state notified by the state command. The data is updated (S4012). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

It should be noted that the clear processing of S4009 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004 when the processing of S4004 goes through the processing of S4004 to the processing of S4008. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S4101 this time has been executed (S4101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102-S4110. In the process of S4101, determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is S4102-S4110, which is mainly a process related to display (effect), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S4111 and the process of updating the variable display setting process of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4112 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). .. The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process goes to S4105 without the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the retained quantity display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed and controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process is a process of monitoring whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed and setting an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. That is, this is a process for displaying the success notification mode or the failure notification mode when the frame button 22 is pressed during the operation effective period of the continuous transformation effect.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S4108), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110), and the processing proceeds to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output processing of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S4111, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4111). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the command determination process ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S4112). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4112 is finished, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-progress flag are both turned on (S4115), and the power-off process is executed (S4116). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4114: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). The command determination process (S4111) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 32) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110, as described above.

In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S4201). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( (S4203), and returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S4201: No), then it is determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S4204). When the stop type command is received (S4204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S4204: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4208). Further, in the process of S4208, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b is set. After the processing of S4208 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

Here, the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the game ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), or when the special symbol lottery is performed, so the start Every time a winning is detected or each time a special symbol is selected, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the special symbol holding ball of the main control device 110 by the process of S4208. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203c. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110, at the time of detecting the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S4208 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S4207, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S4207: No), it is then determined whether the status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). When it is determined that the state command has been received (S4209: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4210), and the process returns to the main process.

In the process of S4209, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S4211: Yes), the received prize command is analyzed, and the prize information command process for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect is executed (S4212). , Return to the main processing. Details of the winning information command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4211, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S4211: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop command is received (S4213). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S4213: Yes), it is determined whether the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, and if the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, all pending A stop command process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed based on the lottery result of the reserved balls (S4214). Details of this stop command processing (S4214) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4214 ends, then the stop display of the changing third symbol is set (S4215), and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, when the stop command is not received (S4213: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed (S4216). ), and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is the opening command, the display control device 114 is instructed to start the jackpot opening effect by setting the display opening command to the display control device 114. Further, for example, if the other command is an ending command, a display ending command is set to the display control device 114 to instruct the display control device 114 to start the jackpot ending effect.

By executing this command determination processing, it is possible to execute appropriate processing according to the command output from main controller 110.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the details of the winning information command process (S4212) described above will be described. As described above, the winning information command process (S4212) is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect.

In the prize information command process (see FIG. 34), first, the information notified by the received prize information command is stored in the prize information storage area 223a in the reserved first to fourth free areas, and the reserved area with the smallest number. (S4301). Next, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is read (S4302), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4303).

By the processing of S4303, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is less than 2 (S4303: No), the holding sphere number (2 or more) required to execute the continuous notice effect is not reached. This means that this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4303, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4303: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the notice effect inhibition flag 223h is ON ( S4304). In the process of S4304, when it is determined that the notice production prohibition flag 223h is turned on (S4304: Yes), it is currently in the notice lottery prohibited state, and the determination of whether or not the continuous notice production is executable (execution lottery) is prohibited. Since it is in the state of being, the processing of S4305 to S4311 for carrying out the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect is skipped, and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4304, when it is determined that the notice production prohibition flag 223h is off (S4304: No), the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4305), and the read notice selection table 222b is read. Of these, by comparing the random number value (counter value) defined corresponding to the variation type notified by the prize information command this time with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. (S4306). That is, it is determined whether or not any one of the ranges of the random number values defined in association with each of the announcement effects A to C and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f match.

Next, it is determined whether the determination result by the process of S4306 is a determination result corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307), and when the determination result corresponds to the non-execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307: No). , And this processing is finished as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4307: Yes), first, the effect type of the current continuous announcement effect specified from the announcement selection table 222b is selected. Accordingly, the notice type flag 223k is updated (S4308). That is, if the present effect type is the notice effect A, the first bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1) and other bits are set to OFF (0), and if the notice effect B is set, the notice type flag is set. If the second bit of the 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF (0), and the notice effect C is set, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF ( Set to 0).

When the process of S4308 ends, next, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is read (S4309), and the read counter value is set in the notice number counter 223i (S4310). As a result, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous notice presentation over the variable display based on all currently held balls. When the process of S4310 ends, the notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON to set the notice lottery prohibition state (S4311), and this process ends.

By executing the prize information command process (see FIG. 34), the variable display based on the pending ball held at the time of receiving the current prize information command and the variable display based on the prize information command are executed. It is possible to set continuous notice productions that are performed. As described above, the determination rate of the continuous announcement effect is higher in the case of the big hit than in the case of the result of the lottery notified by the prize information command being off. Therefore, when the continuous announcement effect is executed, it is possible to make the player have an expectation for the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, details of the above-described stop command processing (S4214) will be described. As described above, this stop command process (S4214) determines whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, and if the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, the result of the lottery results of all the reserved balls that have been put on hold is determined. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the above.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) is executed, it is determined whether the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on (S4401), and when it is determined that it is off (S4401: No). Since this means that it is not the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibited state, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is on (that is, the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibition state) (S4401: Yes), the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is released in order to release the advance notice lottery prohibition state. Is turned off and the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is turned off (S4402). Next, the counter value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is read (S4403), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S4404).

In the process of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the read special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 1 or less (S4404: No), the holding ball number required to execute the continuous notice effect is not enough, This processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the processing of S4404, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 2 or more (S4404: Yes), the holding balls of the holding ball number or more necessary for executing the continuous notice effect are Since it means being held, each process of S4405 to S4415 for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each holding ball.

More specifically, first, of each of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, the logical sum (see FIG. 14) of the upper 6-bit data in each area other than the reserved first area is calculated (S4405). Then, it is determined whether the most significant bit of the calculated logical sum is 1 (on) (S4406), and if it is on (S4406: Yes), the change type of the on bit (that is, per special reach) is determined. Each process of S4409 to S4415 for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed at a corresponding ratio.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4406, if it is determined that the most significant bit of the OR data is not 1 (that is, 0) (S4406: No), then the bit lower by 1 bit than the currently determined bit is It is determined whether it is 1 (ON) (S4407). In the processing of S4407, when it is determined that the bit lower by 1 bit is not 1 (that is, 0) (S4407: No), it is determined whether the bit determined this time is the lowest bit in the logical sum data. It is determined (S4408).

In the processing of S4408, when it is determined that the target bit subjected to this determination is not the least significant bit in the logical sum data (S4408: No), the processing is shifted to S4407, and thereafter, the processing of S4407 is performed. In the determination, 1 (on) bits are detected (S4407: Yes), or in the process of S4408, it is determined that all the bits up to the least significant bit are not 1 (on) (that is, 0) (S4408). Up to ), the processes of S4407 and S4408 are repeatedly executed.

In the process of S4407, when the bit of 1 (on) is detected (S4407: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at a rate according to the variation type associated with the bit of 1 (on). Each processing of S4409-S4415 for performing is performed. On the other hand, in the processing of S4408, when it is determined that all the bits up to the least significant bit are not 1 (on) (that is, 0) (S4408: No), the currently reserved balls are continuously stored. Since this means that the lottery result that is the target of the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice production is not included, the present process is ended.

In the process of S4406 or S4407, if a bit of 1 (on) is detected from the logical sum data (S4406: Yes, or S4407: Yes), first, the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is displayed. It is read (S4409). Next, based on the variation type associated with the bit detected to be 1 (ON) in the process of S4406 or S4407 and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f, the read advance notice selection table 222b is referred to. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect (whether the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random number value defined in the announcement selection table 222b) (S4410).

When the process of S4410 is completed, then, in the determination of the process of S4410, a determination result corresponding to the execution of the continuous announcement effect is obtained (the effect lottery counter 223f matches any random number value defined in the announcement selection table 222b). (S4411), and if the determination result is incompatible with the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4411: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4411, when it is determined that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous notice effect (S4411: Yes), first, according to the effect type of the current notice notice specified from the notice selection table 222b. Then, the notice type flag 223k is updated (S4412). That is, if the present effect type is the notice effect A, the first bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1) and other bits are set to OFF (0), and if the notice effect B is set, the notice type flag is set. If the second bit of the 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF (0), and the notice effect C is set, the third bit of the notice type flag 223k is set to ON (1) and the other bits are set to OFF ( Set to 0).

When the processing of S4412 ends, next, the holding areas in which the bit corresponding to the fluctuation type that is the target of this determination is set to 1 (ON) are searched in order from the holding fourth area side ( (S4413), a value corresponding to the retrieved holding area is set in the notice number counter 223i (S4414). For example, if the search result is the reservation fourth area, 4 is set in the notice number counter 223i, and if the search result is the hold second area, 2 is set in the notice number counter 223i.

It should be noted that the search is performed from the reserved fourth area side in order to set the continuous notice effect over a larger number of reserved balls when there are a plurality of reserved areas in which the bit to be searched in S4413 is 1 (on). is there. Specifically, for example, whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect this time is determined by the lottery result corresponding to the variation type of super-reach loss, and the super-reach is lost in the holding fourth area and the holding second area. When the data corresponding to is stored, the super-reach miss of the reserved fourth area can be detected first by searching from the reserved fourth area side. Therefore, it is possible to set the execution of the continuous notice effect over the four variable displays. On the other hand, if the search is performed from the hold first area, the search ends at the time when the out-of-reach data of the hold second area is detected. Is reduced (the display is changed twice based on the data stored in the reserved first and second areas). Therefore, by performing a search from the holding fourth area side, it is possible to set the continuous notice effect over a larger number of variable displays, so that the player's expectation can be held for a longer period of time. be able to.

When the process of S4414 ends, the notice production prohibition flag 223h is turned on to set the notice lottery prohibition state (S4415), and this process ends.

By this stop command processing, at the timing when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, logical sum data is generated based on the data of all the holding areas except the first holding area in the winning information storage area 223a, and the logical sum data is generated. It is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the sum data. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 as compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed after checking the details of the data of all the holding areas. it can. More specifically, for example, in the case where all the reserved balls are out-of-long or out-of-short (that is, a lottery result which is not a target of determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect), the first logical Since all the bits of the sum data become 0, the processing can be terminated at that point. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the method in which each bit of all the reserved areas is determined one by one. Further, for example, even when there are a plurality of holding balls that are the targets for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, if the determination is made based on the logical sum data, only the most significant bit in which 1 data is set is determined. Thus, it is possible to easily specify the variation type having the highest expectation (priority for determining whether to execute the continuous announcement effect) in the hold. Therefore, the variation with the highest expectation (priority for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect) is determined from among the plurality of variation types that are targets for determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect by determining each bit of all the reserved areas. There is no need to perform processing such as specifying the type. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, in the process of S4413, a search for a reserved area in which the bit corresponding to the variation type that is the determination target of the continuous announcement effect is ON is executed in order from the reserved fourth area. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reserved first area is searched in order. With such a configuration, when there are a plurality of holding balls of the variation type that are subject to determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect this time, which is specified based on the logical sum data, the continuous announcement effect is executed It is possible to prevent the fluctuation display of the fluctuation type having the same degree of expectation from being executed a plurality of times. That is, for example, in a case where data corresponding to a variation type of out-of-reach is stored in the holding second area and the holding fourth area, when the holding area is searched from the holding fourth area side, the holding fourth area The continuous notice presentation is executed until the variable display corresponding to the area data. In this case, in the continuous notice effect of 1, the super-reach failure (variable display with high expectation) occurs twice (a plurality of times). Even if the expectation for the jackpot was further increased by the continuous high-expectation fluctuation display and the continuous advance notice production being executed during that period, if it finally fell off, a game There is a possibility that the player's motivation for the game may be greatly reduced. On the other hand, if the holding area is searched from the holding first area side, it is possible to minimize the number of times the fluctuation display of the fluctuation type having a high expectation is executed in one continuous notice presentation. Even if the player fails in the continuous notice production, it is possible to make it difficult to reduce the motivation of the player for the game.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4501). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S4501: No), it means that the variation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S4507 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S4501: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S4502), and then in the processing of S4203 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 33), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired (S4503).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variation display started based on the variation pattern command this time, and if it is set, the announcement effect setting process for setting the announcement effect is executed (S4504). .. The details of the notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4504 ends, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation display mode determined in the process of S4504 is generated, and the command is displayed. It is set for transmission to 114 (S4505). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S4506). In the process of S4506, the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S4507). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S4507: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S4507: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S4508), and then in the process of S4206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 33), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S4509).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, and based on the set stop type, the display control device 114 is displayed. A display stop type command for notification is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4510), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, details of the above-mentioned notice effect setting process (S4504) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This advance notice effect setting process (S4504) is a process executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 36). This is a process for determining whether it has been set, and if it has been set, setting a notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the notice production setting process (see FIG. 37), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4601). (S4601: Yes), which means that the continuous notice effect has been set for the variable display this time, so the notice type flag 223k is read (S4602). Next, a change pattern accompanied by the notice effect of the form indicated by the notice type flag 223k is determined by referring to the change pattern selection table 222a (S4603), the value of the notice number counter 223i is decremented by 1 (S4604), and this process is executed. To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the value of the notice number counter 223i is 0 (S4601: No), first, the change pattern selection table 222a is referred to for the change pattern in a mode not accompanied by the notice effect. It is determined (S4605), and then it is determined whether the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is on (S4606). In the process of S4606, when it is determined that the notice production prohibition flag 223h is ON (S4606: Yes), it means that it is the start timing of the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice production. The release flag 223j is set to ON (S4607), and this processing ends. By setting the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4607, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is continued during the change period of the change display (the first change display after the end of the continuous advance notice production) which is started this time. When the change ends, the advance notice lottery prohibition state can be canceled in the stop command process (see FIG. 35) (see S4402 in FIG. 35). By configuring to keep the notice lottery prohibited state until the first variable display after the end of the continuous notice effect, it is possible to prevent the continuous notice effect from being executed again without an interval after the end of the continuous notice effect. it can.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 51. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 38, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program, so that the NOR ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the boot process (S6001) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, reduce the manufacturing cost, and suppress the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 38). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization processing (see S6002 in FIG. 38) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing is completed.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot processing, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 39, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 include all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be performed after the process of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Also, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 38. When the boot process is completed, next, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set in each flag. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on variation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 49A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 49A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 16 is drawn. The determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40B) are executed.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without any fear that the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency can be prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining resident image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image continues to be displayed for a long time after the power is turned on. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40A is a flow chart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 40B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display it on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

After the display setting processing is executed, next, task processing is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview production or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that form one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305). 20 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. Examples of the counter updated by the process of S6307 include a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop types indicated by the display stop type command (big hits A to F, small hits, front/rear reach, non-front/rear reach, complete disconnection). ) Corresponding to the stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45, the details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 41, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of big hit A to F, small hit, out of reach, and completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (S6601), the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40(b)) is compared, and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop design after the fluctuating effect is set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the identified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" will be displayed, and the player will be confused that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol jackpot", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409) and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display round command is displayed. If there is a use round number command (S6410: Yes), a round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6805), the number-of-rounds command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 41, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S6414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). .. Then, among the bits of the back surface image discrimination flag provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is set to ON, and other bits are set. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7002. ..

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the rear surface image determination flag set in S7002 indicates that The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the type of RAM storing the image data corresponding to the range of the back image (resident Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than 2 back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract an arbitrary one of the back image change commands and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6416), and there is an error command. If (S6416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S7102), and the error command The process ends and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in step S7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person related to the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 41. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6418), and the process returns to S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is a new unprocessed command in the command buffer area, and if there is a new unprocessed command (S6401: Yes). ), and the processes of S6402 to S6418 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 42(b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, regarding other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 42A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the processing of clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, etc. are set for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 46. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing is finished. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 46, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering contents developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite, Various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the final display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display effect is not yet produced, and it is the time to perform the finalized display effect. First, the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The data is set (S7210), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol final display effect in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so that a fixed time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect. After that, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 40B). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends. The process of setting the display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S7502).

In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the processing of S7601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the processing proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S7603: No), the unresident A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 40B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 40B) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 40B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 41 to 45) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 46 to 48) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S7501: No in FIG. 49A).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

Further, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is being continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S7708), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S7709). If the back image change flag is not on but is off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S7710), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal The leading address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the processing of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal image transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

As described above, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the process indicated by the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the stop type information to be given is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare production can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, if the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 20) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order from the rearmost sprite in the one frame image to the frontmost sprite, and the rearranged sprites are sorted in the detailed order for each sprite. As the drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source last address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and those information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 40B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be capable of executing the continuous notice effect in which the notice effect of the same system is executed over a plurality of continuous variable displays. Whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is basically determined when a new starting prize for the first entrance 64 is detected. When the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it is executed over the variable display based on the reserved ball held at the time when the new starting winning is detected and the variable display based on the new starting winning. In this continuous notice effect, the percentage of determination is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case where the lottery result of the new starting prize is missed, so if the continuous notice effect is executed, it is given to the player. You can have a sense of expectation for jackpots.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the announcement lottery prohibition state that prohibits the continuous announcement effect lottery is set. This is to prevent (suppress) duplicate determination of the continuous announcement effect during execution of the continuous announcement effect. More specifically, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the detection of a new start winning even during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the type of the announcement effect during the continuous announcement effect is determined. There is a possibility of switching. For example, when a new start winning is detected to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect while the notice effect B is set and the execution of the notice effect A is decided, the notice effect B is set. May be discontinued, and there may be a switch from the next change to the notice effect A. That is, there is a possibility that the player will be disappointed by switching from the performance type with relatively high expectations (preliminary effect B) to the performance type with low expectations (preliminary effect A). In addition, when a continuous announcement effect of the same effect type is newly decided during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the continuous announcement effects are continuously displayed over the number of times of the number of holding balls held at the start of the continuous announcement effect. The notice production will be executed. As a result, it may be difficult for the player to understand which reserve ball should have a sense of expectation, and thus the meaning of the production may be difficult to understand. In addition, as a method of solving these problems, it is allowed to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed only when the start winning corresponding to the jackpot is detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect that is finally out. Also, a method may be considered in which the effect type of the continuous notice effect additionally determined is configured to have an expectation level equal to or higher than the effect type of the continuous notice effect being executed. However, in this case, it is necessary to determine a plurality of conditions each time a start winning is detected during execution of the continuous announcement effect, and to perform control processing for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the type of the announcement. However, there is a problem that the processing load may increase.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, a new continuous announcement effect is newly executed after the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined and after the end of the continuous announcement effect until the end of one variable display. It is configured such that it is prohibited to determine whether the item is acceptable or not. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production type from being switched during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, and the continuous announcement effect being continued beyond the number of holding balls at the start of the continuous announcement effect. You can Furthermore, at the time of starting winning, it is only necessary to perform a simple control of determining whether or not the notice lottery is prohibited and skipping the determination process of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed if the notice lottery is prohibited. The processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in the first embodiment, triggered by the cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the lottery results of all the reserved balls held at that time are determined, and based on the determination result, the continuous advance notice production is performed. Is configured to determine whether to execute. Although the details of the determination method will be described later, by determining whether or not the continuous notice production can be performed by taking into consideration the lottery results of all the reserved balls, despite the fact that the reserved balls having a higher degree of expectation are reserved, It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low expectation. Therefore, a situation in which a continuous announcement effect is set for a holding ball with a low degree of expectation but a continuous announcement effect is not set for a holding ball with a high degree of expectation, or a hold with a high degree of expectation during the continuous announcement effect It is possible to prevent the situation in which the ball is consumed and the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation is consumed at the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is configured to be continued after the end of the continuous advance notice effect until the end of one normal (not set for advance notice) variable display. With this configuration, it is possible to execute at least one normal variable display after the end of the continuous announcement effect until the start of the next continuous announcement effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the continuous advance notice effect being started again immediately after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, and the continuous advance notice effect being continued indefinitely. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand which of the reserved balls should have a feeling of expectation during execution of the continuous notice presentation.

In the first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, logical sum data is generated based on the data stored in each of the holding areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and based on the logical sum data. Although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice presentation, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time a prize information command is received, logical sum data may be generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 223. With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of calculating the logical sum data when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, and therefore whether the continuous advance notice production can be executed or not when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released. The processing load required for the determination can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, the continuous announcement effect is executed over all the reserved balls held at the time of the decision, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the range of the reserved balls for performing the continuous announcement effect may be further determined according to the lottery result or the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a continuous announcement effect in which the disengagement is finally notified, the continuous number of times of the announcement effect is configured to be 3 times or less, while the success notification is finally notified. In the case of the notice production, the maximum number of consecutive notice productions may be four. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the number of consecutive notice productions, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, the continuous announcement effect is set over all the holding balls held at the time of the decision, and then the continuous announcement effect is finished. It was configured to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state. That is, once the number of consecutive notice productions in the consecutive notice production is determined, the number of consecutive notices is not increased or decreased, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, if a new winning information command is received during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the execution lottery of the continuous announcement effect may be performed. That is, it may be configured to execute a lottery (continuous notice extension lottery) as to whether or not to extend the continuous notice effect until the variable display corresponding to the new winning information. In this case, the continuous announcement extension lottery may be configured only in the case of the continuous announcement effect in which the continuous announcement effect that is being executed finally notifies the disengagement. With this configuration, the continuous announcement effect can be continuously executed over a larger number of times, so that the player's interest can be improved. Further, the extension of the continuous announcement effect may be determined only when a new starting prize is won. With such a configuration, when the continuous announcement effect exceeds the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls, which is 4, the player wins the continuous announcement extension lottery and is also a big hit. Can also be understood. Therefore, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to the number of consecutive notice productions during the execution of the consecutive notice productions.

In the first embodiment, the logical sum of the upper 6 bits of each holding area is calculated and used for the execution determination of the continuous announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to 6 bits, and the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 and the like. It may be arbitrarily set according to. Further, the lottery probability (judgment ratio) of the continuous notice production corresponding to each lottery result may be arbitrarily set.

In the first embodiment, the continuous announcement effect is configured to be executable only when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the number of reserved balls is one, it may be configured such that whether or not to execute the notice effect is drawn by lot. In this case, the variation display of the third symbol accompanied by the notice effect is performed in one variation time within one variation time (that is, the variation time of the first symbol and the variation time of the third symbol are matched). Good, the variable display of the third symbol accompanied by the notice effect is executed multiple times within the variable time of 1 (that is, the variable display of the third symbol of the variable time shorter than the variable time of the first symbol is executed multiple times. Yes).

In the first embodiment, as the continuous notice effect, three identical third symbols are displayed in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the three third symbols are stopped, the third symbol is displayed. Although the notice effect displayed in a burning manner has been described, the manner of the notice effect is not limited to this. For example, during execution of the continuous announcement effect, the same (or similar aspect) effect may be generated at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) in each fluctuation, or at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of fluctuation stop). ), the same character (or a similar mode) may appear. In addition, a series of productions that have a storyline (for example, a production in which a big hit is reported by fighting an enemy and winning, or a presentation in which a big hit is announced if you can escape from an enemy) is set as a continuous notice presentation. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that it is executed over all variable displays. Further, when the continuous notice effect is set, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect of the same system with all the variable displays within the setting range. For example, when the notice effect is determined, the notice effect is determined. It may be configured to change the mode of the reserved symbol showing the reserved ball corresponding to the mode to a mode different from the normal until the end of variation (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbol or changing the reserved symbol to a predetermined character). .. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the holding ball have an expectation before the variable display based on the holding ball corresponding to the holding symbol whose mode is changed is started.

In the first embodiment, when the continuous notice effect is set, the main symbols with the same numbers displayed in each symbol row are different from the other third symbols (the aura is summarized). Although it is configured to be displayed in the mode), the effect to be changed to a different mode may be executed other than during the execution of the continuous notice effect. Specifically, for example, only when the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed, one main symbol is displayed in the same manner as the notice effect, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the aspect is changed. An effect may be executed in which the main symbols with the same numbers as the symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols to which the same numbers are attached are displayed in the same manner as the notice effect, and when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, the aspect is changed. You may perform the effect that the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol is not stopped and displayed. That is, it may be configured such that an effect (so-called fake effect) that runs in the same effect mode as the case where the notice effect is set is executed halfway and becomes a different effect mode from the notice effect on the way. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the continuous notice effect has started until it becomes an effect mode different from the notice effect, so that the execution lottery of the continuous notice effect is won for a long period of time. Even if it is not possible, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the continuous notice production.

In the first embodiment, the ratio in which the continuous announcement effect is determined according to the variation type and the ratio in each announcement effect type are variable, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the variation type, the ratio in which the continuous announcement effect is determined depending on the jackpot type and the ratio of the types of each announcement effect may be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, depending on whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed and the type of the notice effect, so that the player's interest in the continuous notice effect is further enhanced. Can be improved.

In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in a state where the advance notice lottery prohibition state is not set (the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is on), and the prize information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113, the advance notice is always issued. In the selection table 222b, the range of the random number value (value of the effect lottery counter 223f) corresponding to the variation type of this time is referred to determine whether the continuous announcement effect can be executed (lottery), but the configuration is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, when a reserved ball having a higher degree of expectation than the current starting winning prize (a lottery result advantageous to the player) is already held, the continuous notice effect may not be drawn. If you decide the continuous announcement effect with the holding ball with higher expectation than this start winning prize already held, if the variable display with high expectation is executed in the middle of the continuous announcement effect In the last variable display of the continuous notice presentation, a situation occurs in which the variable display with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. In other words, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation will produce a sloping tail. On the other hand, when a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation has already been held, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the degree of expectation becomes a blunt dip by not performing the lottery itself of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the variable display executed at the end of the continuous notice presentation can give a great sense of expectation. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released when the variation ends once after the continuous advance notice effect ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the advance notice lottery prohibited state may be released when the last variable display of the continuous advance notice effect is finished.

In the first embodiment, when the start winning is detected in the state where the advance notice lottery is not prohibited, the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed without limitation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the jackpot is already included in the hold, it may be configured to avoid the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a big hit in the middle of the continuous announcement effect and the interruption of the continuous announcement effect. In addition, for example, when the jackpot lottery result is held in the holding first area, it may be configured to avoid the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. With this configuration, even if a jackpot already exists in the hold at the time when a new start winning is detected, a fluctuation involving at least two notice productions is performed before the jackpot is notified. The display can be performed. That is, it is possible to suppress that the variable display accompanied by the notice production is executed only once and the big hit is notified. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player think that the continuous announcement effect has been executed in order to notify the big hit, it is possible to prevent the effect from being unnatural. In this case, the setting of the continuous notice effect is reset at the time of the big hit, and at the timing when the big hit ends, whether the continuous notice effect can be executed or not is executed based on the lottery result (variation type) of each held ball. It may be configured to make a determination.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 59. In the above-described first embodiment, every time a start winning is detected, the lottery result (such as the winning or losing pattern and the variation pattern) of the special symbol is pre-read from various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the starting winning, The pre-reading result is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to perform the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the pre-read result notified by the winning information command. In addition, in the first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, the announcement lottery prohibition state is set to prevent (suppress) the determination of the continuous announcement effect in duplicate. .. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in the respective holding areas of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated at the time of the release, and the continuous advance notice production is executed based on the logical sum. It is configured to judge whether or not it is possible. That is, based on the logical sum data, whether or not the holding ball includes a holding ball of a variation type that is a determination target of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, and the fluctuation with the highest degree of expectation among the current holding balls. The type is determined. Then, when the variation type that is the determination target of whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executable is included, the availability of the continuous announcement effect is determined at the determination rate (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation ( The lottery) was adopted.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, points are set according to the variation type, and the total value of points corresponding to one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be grasped. .. While the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set, the total points are updated each time a new prize information command is received.When the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, the points are suspended based on the total value of points. The type of fluctuation included in the sphere is grasped to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the start winning in the main controller 110, the range of the values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. The value range is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment is configured to determine only the acquired value range without performing prefetching. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the range of the random number value (counter value) notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110 in place of the prize information command. The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute prefetching.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration. That is, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is partially changed. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in 113 is partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is executed. The point is that the control processing performed is partially changed. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52A, the ROM 202 of the second embodiment has a random number range selection table 202e in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 9A). Are different. Other configurations are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The random number range selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to specify a range of values to which various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 belong. At the time of starting winning, various counter values are compared with the random number range selection table 202e to specify the range of values to which the counter value (random number value) belongs (see S412 in FIG. 55). The specified range of the counter value (random number value) is output to the voice lamp controller 113 by the random number range command (see S413 in FIG. 55).

Details of the random number range selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 52(b) and 52(c). FIG. 52B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number range selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 52B, the random number range selection table 202e includes a hit random number range table 202e1 for specifying a value range of the first hit random number counter C1 and a value range of the first hit type counter C2. At least a hit type range table 202e2 for specifying and a change type range table 202e3 for specifying the value range of the change type counter CS1 are configured.

Of the tables constituting the random number range selection table 202e, an outline of the prescribed contents of each table constituting the random number range selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. ..

As shown in FIG. 52C, in the random number range table 202e1, the data (range parameter) indicating the range of the random number value (counter value) and the value range of the first random number counter C1 are associated with each other. It is prescribed. More specifically, for the value “0” of the first random number counter C1 (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol, and the big hit random number in the probability variation state), the range parameter “00H” is associated and defined. , The range of the value of the first random number counter C1 "1 to 9" (that is, the big hit random number in the probability variation state of the special symbol), the range parameter "01H" is defined in association, the first random number counter The range parameter “02H” is defined in association with the value range “10 to 49” of C1 and the range parameter “50 to 99” is specified with respect to the value range “50 to 99” of the first random number counter C1. 03H" is associated and defined, and the range parameter "04H" is associated and defined with respect to the value range "100 to 149" of the first random number counter C1. Thereafter, different range parameter values are defined in association with every 50 random value ranges.

With reference to the hit random number range table 202e1, for example, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is "60", the range to which the value of the first hit random number counter C1 belongs is " Since it is “50 to 99”, “03H” is specified as the range parameter indicating the range of the random number value this time. Further, for example, if the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is “375”, the range to which the value of the first random number counter C1 belongs is “350 to 399”, and therefore the range of the random number value of this time. “09H” is specified as the range parameter indicating “”.

It should be noted that only the judgment value corresponding to the same judgment result is defined in each range. That is, in the range corresponding to the range parameter “00H”, only the determination value determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, in the range corresponding to the range parameter “01H”, only the determination value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined. Further, in the range corresponding to the range parameters “02H” to “09H”, only the determination value determined to be out of range is defined. As described above, by configuring each range with only the same type of determination value, each range and the determination result can be in one-to-one correspondence. That is, the judgment values corresponding to a plurality of judgment results are mixed in one range, and even if the range is specified, the judgment result using the counter value (random number value) of the range cannot be specified. Can be suppressed. Therefore, based on the range parameter specified and notified by referring to the hit random number range table 202e1, the pre-reading process can be accurately executed on the side of the voice lamp control device 113.

Although not shown in the drawings, the same applies to the other tables (per hit type range table 202e2, fluctuation type range table 202e3) that make up the random number range selection table 202e, similarly to the first hit type counter C2 or the fluctuation type counter CS1. The range of the value of and the value of the range parameter are defined in association with each other. Further, the plurality of ranges set in each table are configured only by the judgment values corresponding to the same judgment result.

As described above, the range parameter specified by referring to each data table defined in the random number range selection table 202e such as the hit random number range table 202e1 is output to the voice lamp controller 113 by the random number range command. .. The voice lamp control device 113 pre-reads various lottery results (lottery results of special symbols, jackpot types, and variation patterns) based on the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) notified by the random number range command belong. Although details will be described later, a range of various counter values (random number values) that can be notified by the random number range command and a lottery result based on the various counter values are defined in association with each other in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. A data table is provided. Upon receiving the random number range command, the voice lamp control device 113 prefetches the lottery result for each counter type based on each data table.

In this way, the range to which the values of the various counter values (random number values) acquired based on the start winning is included is output to the voice lamp controller 113, and the voice lamp controller 113 receives the various counter values ( The processing load on the main controller 110 side can be reduced by adopting a configuration in which prefetching is executed based on a data table that defines the correspondence relationship between the range to which the value of the random number) belongs and the lottery result. That is, when the start winning is detected, the main control device 110 needs to execute a process of pre-reading the lottery result by comparing each of the random number values defined in the various data tables with the counter value acquired this time. Instead, it is only necessary to compare the range of values defined in the random number range selection table 202e with the counter value acquired this time. Therefore, in the main controller 110 that performs main control related to the game, such as jackpot lottery and update of the display mode of the first symbol, the main control related to the game is surely executed without delay by reducing the processing load. can do. Further, instead of outputting the counter value (random number value) itself obtained based on the start winning to the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value (random number value) is converted into a range of values to which the voice lamp control device 113 belongs. Therefore, even if the random number range command is illegally acquired from the outside, the random number value (the value of the first random number counter C1) that is a big hit from the illegally acquired random number range command is output. It can be difficult to predict. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the deterrence effect against illegal acts. Further, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, the pre-reading process corresponding to various counters can be executed based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value), so the main control device 110 special symbol variation start process. (See FIG. 23) The prefetch can be executed under conditions closer to the various lottery executed in (). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the pre-reading result.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53A, the ROM 222 in the second embodiment is different from the ROM 222 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12A) in the point selection table 222c and the subordinate random number table. 222d, a subordinate hit type table 222e, a subordinate change type table 222f, and a release time selection table 222g are added at least.

The point selection table 222c is a data table that is referred to for identifying points according to the variation type identified by the prefetch. While the advance notice lottery is prohibited, the point selection table 222c is referred to and the total value of points is updated every time the variation type is specified by the look-ahead.

Details of the point selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54A is a diagram showing the specified contents of the point selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 54(a), points are associated with each variation type and defined in the point selection table 222c.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), "30 points" are defined in association with the variation type "per special reach" (see 222c1 in FIG. 54(a)), and the variation For the types “per super reach” and “per normal reach”, “5 points” are defined in association with each other (see 222c2 and 222c3 in FIG. 54(a)), “special reach out” and “super reach”. "1 point" is defined in association with "out" and "out of normal reach" (see 222c4 to 222c6 in Fig. 54(a)). On the other hand, “0 points” are defined in association with other fluctuation types (“long deviation”, “short deviation”) (see 222c7 in FIG. 54A).

In the second embodiment, when the variation type is specified by prefetching based on the random number range command in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the point selection table 222c is referred to and the point corresponding to the prefetch result of this time is specified. The identified points are added to the point storage area 223m described later. As a result, in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, the points corresponding to all the reserved balls can be updated at the same time as the prefetching.

Returning to FIG. 53A, the description will be continued. The subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate variation type table 222f respectively include a first random number counter C1, a first permissible type counter C2, and a variation type counter output from the main controller 110 by a random number range command. It is a data table that is referred to in order to prefetch the special symbol win/loss, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern based on the range of values to which each CS1 belongs. The configuration of each of these tables will be described with reference to FIG. 54(b), taking the subordinate random number table 222d as an example.

FIG. 54B is a diagram showing the specified contents of the secondary random number table 222d. As shown in FIG. 54(b), this subordinate random number table 222d has a range (range) of random numbers determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol for each gaming state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state). Parameters) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), as a range (range parameter) of the random number values determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, "00H" is defined in association (FIG. 54( b) 222d1), as a range (range parameter) of the random number value determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol, "00H, 01H" is defined in association (222d2 in FIG. 54(b)). reference).

Although not shown in the figure, the value of the range parameter corresponding to the first hit type counter C2 or the change type counter CS1 is similarly applied to the other data tables (subordinate type table 222e, sub-variation type table 222f). And the determined jackpot type or variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the random number range command, the range parameter corresponding to each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 notified by the command is extracted and extracted. The value of each range parameter is compared with the subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate variation type table 222f to execute the special symbol lottery result, the jackpot type, and the look-ahead of the variation pattern. Based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value), the pre-reading process corresponding to various counters can be executed, so that the main controller 110 executes the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 23). Pre-reading can be executed under conditions closer to the lottery. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the pre-reading result. When the prefetching process is completed, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed, as in the first embodiment. Further, in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, instead of determining whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed, the points according to the variation type specified by the look-ahead are identified by referring to the point selection table, and the data of the point storage area 223m is determined. Is updated.

Returning to FIG. 53A, the description will be continued. The release time selection table 222g is a data table that is referred to when performing the lottery for the continuous notice effect when the notice lottery prohibited state is released. When the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, the continuous notice is obtained by comparing the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m divided by the number of reserved balls with the release selection table 222g. Whether or not the performance can be executed is determined.

Details of the release-time selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54C is a diagram showing the specified contents of the release time selection table 222g. As shown in FIG. 54C, in the release selection table 222g, the effect lottery counter 223f in which execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined for each range of the average value of the points stored in the point storage area 223m. The range of the value of is specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), when the average value (A) of the points is a value larger than 5, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect A is "0". ~19" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect B, "20 to 49" is defined in association with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect C "50 to 59" are associated and defined as the range of (1) (see 222g1 in FIG. 54(c)).

When the average value (A) of points is 5 or less and is greater than 1, "0 to 4" is associated with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect A. As a value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect B, "5 to 19" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect C of "20 to". 29” is defined in association with each other (see 222g2 in FIG. 54(c)). When the average value (A) of the points is 1 or less, "0 to 8" is defined in association with the value range of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to the notice effect A, and the notice effect B is specified. As the value of the effect lottery counter 223f corresponding to, "9" is associated and defined (see 222g3 in FIG. 54(c)). With this release time selection table 222g, when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, it is possible to perform a lottery (determination) on whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed with a lottery probability (determination ratio) according to the average value of the points.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 12B) in that a point storage area 223m is added. Since the other configurations are the same as the configurations of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The point storage area 223m is a storage area for storing and updating the total value of the points corresponding to the variation types of the respective pending balls held during the advance notice lottery prohibited state. The point storage area 223m stores the total value of the values obtained by converting the fluctuation types corresponding to all the held balls to points when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see FIG. 57). See S4713). Each time the points stored in the point storage area 223m receive a random number range command based on a new start winning, and execute the prefetching process based on the range of the random number value (counter value) notified by the command. , Points corresponding to the variation type specified by the prefetch are added and updated (see S4705 in FIG. 57). Further, when a new variable display is started during the advance notice lottery prohibited state, points corresponding to the change type of the variable display to be started are subtracted and updated (see S4613 in FIG. 59).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S111) in the second embodiment. This start winning process 2 (S111) is a process executed instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and like the starting winning process (see FIG. 24), the first winning opening This is a process that is executed in association with the winning of 64 (starting winning).

Of the starting winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, the respective processes of S401 to S406 are the same as the respective processes of S401 to S406 of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 55) in the second embodiment, when the process of S406 is completed, next, the random number range selection table 202e (see FIG. 52(b)) is read (S411) and read. The random number range selection table 202e and the acquired various counter values (random number values) are compared to specify the range of values (range parameter) to which each counter value (random number value) belongs (S412). Next, a random number range command for notifying the range (range parameter) of the value to which the specified counter value (random number value) belongs is set (S413), and this processing ends.

The random number range command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the random number range command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts range parameters corresponding to various counter values (random number values) from the random number range command, and stores the subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate type table 222d in the ROM 222. By comparing with the variation type table 222f, the lottery result based on the present start winning is pre-read.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56 to FIG. 59, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. First, the command determination processing 2 (S4121) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This command determination process 2 (4121) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, and similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, This is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110 and executing the corresponding control.

Of the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, in S4201 to S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216, S4201 to the command determination processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment, respectively. The same processes as the processes of S4210, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

Further, in the command determination processing 2 (see FIG. 56) in the second embodiment, if it is determined in the processing of S4209 that the status command has not been received (S4209: No), then whether the random number range command has been received. If it is determined (S4221) that the random number range command has been received (S4221: Yes), pre-reading is performed based on the range (range parameter) of the values to which the various counter values belong notified by the random number range command. The random number range command process is executed (S4222), and the process is finished. Details of the random number range command processing (S4222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S4221, when it is determined that the random number range command process is not received (S4221: No), the process proceeds to S4213. In the process of S4213, when it is determined that the stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S4213: Yes), the stop command process 2 is executed instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. (S4223), the process proceeds to S4215. Details of this stop command processing 2 (S4223) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the details of the random number range command process (S4222) executed when the random number range command is received in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 56) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 57. This random number range command process (S4222) is a process for performing prefetching based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command, as described above.

In this random number range command processing (see FIG. 57), first, the range parameter for each counter type notified by the random number range command is compared with the subordinate random number table 222d, the subordinate type table 222e, and the subordinate variation type table 222f, respectively. Yes (S4701). That is, the range parameter corresponding to the first per random number counter C1 is the subordinate random number table 222d, the range parameter corresponding to the first per type counter C2 is the subordinate type table 222e, and the range parameter corresponding to the variation type counter CS1 is The lottery result is pre-read by comparing it with the sub-variation type table 222f. Then, the pre-reading result of the processing of S4701 is stored in the empty area of the winning information storage area 223a (S4702).

Next, it is determined whether or not the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703), and when it is determined that the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is on (S4703: Yes), the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set, so the point storage The process for updating the points stored in the area 223m is executed. Specifically, the point selection table 222c is read (S4704). Then, the point corresponding to the prefetch result of the process of S4701 is read from the point selection table 222c, the read point is added to the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4705), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4703, when it is determined that the notice production prohibition flag 223h is off (S4703: No), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls is 2 or more (S4706). That is, it is determined whether or not the minimum number of holding balls necessary for executing the continuous notice presentation is held. In the process of S4706, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or less (S4706: No), it means that the number of reserved balls is less than the minimum required for execution of the continuous announcement effect, and thus this process is directly executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S4706, when it is determined that the number of holding balls is 2 or more (S4706: Yes), it means that the minimum holding balls necessary for executing the continuous announcement effect are held. Therefore, the process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed based on the variation type specified from the range parameter notified by the random number range command this time.

Specifically, first, the notice selection table 222b (see FIG. 13) is read (S4707), and the variation type identified by the prefetching this time and the value of the effect lottery counter 223f are compared with the notice selection table 222b. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed (S4708). Next, in the determination of S4708, it is determined whether or not the determination result corresponds to the execution of the continuous announcement effect (S4709), and when the continuous announcement effect is not executed (S4709: No), the present process is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4709, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is to be executed (S4709: Yes), first, the notice type flag 223k is updated according to the notice type of the notice effect specified from the notice selection table 222b (( S4710). Next, the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is read (S4711), and the read counter value is set as the value of the notice number counter 223i (S4712). Next, by comparing the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) of each reserved ball stored in the winning information storage area 223a with the point selection table 222c, the variation type of each reserved ball is converted into points. (S4713). Then, the total value of points is stored in the point storage area 223m (S4714), the advance notice effect prohibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4715), and the present process is ended.

By this random number range command process (see FIG. 57), the prefetch process can be accurately executed based on the range parameter notified by the random number range command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the stop command processing 2 (S4223) described above will be described. This stop command process 2 (S4223) is a process executed instead of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, as described above.

In the stop command processing 2 (S4223) in the second embodiment, S4401 to S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 are respectively executed in the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in S4401 to S4415. The same processes as the processes of S4404, S4411, S4412, S4414, and S4415 are executed.

In the stop command process 2 (S4223) of the second embodiment, when the process of S4404 ends, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are then read (S4421), and the read point is 0. It is determined whether or not (S4422). In the process of S4422, when it is determined that the read point is 0 (S4422: Yes), the pending balls that are to be held include the pending ball that is the determination target of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. Since this means that there is no such information, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4422, when it is determined that the read value is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4422: No), the holding ball corresponding to the variation type that is the determination target of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. Indicates that at least one is reserved, first, the average value (A) is calculated by dividing the points read from the point storage area 223m by the number of reserved balls (the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b) ( S4423).

Next, by comparing the average value (A) calculated in the process of S4423 with the release selection table 222g (see FIG. 54(c)), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed (S4424). The processing moves to S4411.

Further, in the stop command processing 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the processing of S4412 is completed, the holding area in which the data corresponding to the holding balls of the expectation corresponding to the range of the average value is stored is opened. , And the reserved fourth area in the winning information storage area 223a are searched in order (S4425), and the process proceeds to S4414. For example, if the average value (A) is 1 or less, it means that at least one of the special reach out, the super reach out, and the normal reach out is included in the hold balls. In order from the 4 areas, the reserved areas in which the data corresponding to the fluctuation types corresponding to the out-of-contact with the reach are stored are searched.

Further, in the stop command process 2 (see FIG. 58) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4415 ends, the points stored in the point storage area 223m are reset to 0 (S4426), and the present process ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notice effect setting process 2 (S4521). This advance notice effect setting process 2 (S4521) is a process that is executed instead of the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and is the same as the advance notice performance setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment. Similarly, it is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variation display to be started based on the variation pattern command this time, and setting the announcement effect if it is set.

Of the notice production setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, the processes of S4601 to S4607 are the same as the notice production setting process (see FIG. 37) of S4601 to S4607 in the first embodiment. The same processing is executed.

Further, in the notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59) in the second embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 ends, the point selection table 222c is read (S4611), and the current execution is performed from the read table. The point corresponding to the fluctuation type of the fluctuation display to be started is specified (S4612). Then, the point specified in the processing of S4612 is updated by subtracting it from the value stored in the point storage area 223m (S4613), and this processing ends. By executing this notice effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 59), the points stored in the point storage area 223m can be always maintained at the total value of the points of the held reserve balls.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the points are set according to the variation type, and the total value of the points corresponding to one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is set. Configured to be graspable. While the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set, the total points are updated each time a new prize information command is received.When the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, the points are suspended based on the total value of points. The type of fluctuation included in the sphere is grasped to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, whether the pending ball corresponding to the variation type that is the determination target of the execution availability of the continuous announcement effect is held from the value of the point, the type of the variation type that is the determination target of the execution availability, etc. It can be easily identified. In addition, after the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the change types of all the reserved balls are discriminated one by one, and it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed according to the discrimination result. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when various counter values are acquired based on the detection of the start winning in the main controller 110, the range of the values to which the acquired various counter values belong is determined and determined. The range parameter corresponding to the range of values is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. That is, the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment is configured to determine only the acquired value range without performing prefetching. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the range of various counter values based on the value of the range parameter notified by the random number range command output from the main control device 110, and the voice lamp control device 113 side pre-reads. It is configured to execute. With this configuration, when the start winning is detected, the main control device 110 compares the random number values defined in the various data tables with the counter value acquired this time to prefetch the lottery result. Since it is not necessary to execute the process and only the range of values defined in the random number range selection table 202e and the counter value acquired this time need be compared, the processing load can be reduced. Therefore, in the main control device 110 that performs main control of the game such as jackpot lottery and update of the display mode of the first symbol, it is possible to prevent the processing from becoming heavy, so that the main control of the game is surely performed. Can be executed without delay. Further, instead of outputting the counter value (random number value) itself obtained based on the start winning to the voice lamp control device 113, the counter value (random number value) is converted into a range of values to which the voice lamp control device 113 belongs. Therefore, even if the random number range command is illegally acquired from the outside, the random number value (the value of the first random number counter C1) that is a big hit from the illegally acquired random number range command is output. It can be difficult to predict. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the deterrence effect against illegal acts. Further, on the side of the voice lamp control device 113, the pre-reading process corresponding to various counters can be executed based on the range of the notified counter value (random number value), so the main control device 110 special symbol variation start process. (See FIG. 23) The prefetch can be executed under conditions closer to the various lottery executed in (). Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the pre-reading result.

In the second embodiment, various counter values acquired when a new starting winning is detected are converted into range parameters and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a random number range command, but it is not always necessary. No need to convert to range parameters. For example, the same number of conversion parameters as the number of values that various counter values (random number values) can take are prepared so that each value that various counter values can take and the value of the conversion parameter have a one-to-one correspondence. It may be configured to be set. Then, when various counter values are acquired based on the start winning, it may be configured to convert the various counter values into the value of the conversion parameter and notify the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 side may be provided with various data tables that define the correspondence between the conversion parameters and the lottery results. With such a configuration, the lottery result can be prefetched on the voice lamp control device 113 side under a condition closer to various lottery performed on the main control device 110 side, and thus prefetching can be performed more accurately. it can.

In the second embodiment, the range of values to which the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 that are acquired based on the start winning are included are specified by the random number range selection table 202e, Although the specified range is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the random number range command, the type of counter to be subject to this control is not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily set.

In the second embodiment, the range to which the various counter values acquired based on the start winning a prize belong is specified and notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the random number range command. However, information other than the range is transmitted. It may be configured to notify. For example, as a table to be compared with various counter values at the time of starting winning, a data table for which a random number value and a lottery result are associated and defined is prepared for each counter value, and various counter values are based on the starting winning. It is also possible to specify the lottery result corresponding to and output it to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command. With this configuration, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be reduced. Further, in this case, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated data table to be referred to in order to specify the lottery results of various counter values at the time of starting winning, and the data table used to execute the lottery of special symbols at the start of fluctuation is shared. It may be configured to be used in.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is canceled, the logical sum of the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is calculated at the time of cancellation, and the calculated logical sum data is calculated. The variation type included in the reserved ball is determined based on the above. Then, based on the determined variation type, whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is determined.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, during the advance lottery prohibited state, the type of lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation and the lottery with the highest expectation among the lottery results based on all the reserved balls. The holding area in which the holding ball corresponding to the result is held is configured to be stored. The stored information is updated every time the pre-reading result based on a new start winning is notified by the winning information command. In other words, by comparing the type of lottery result (variation type) based on the new start winning and the type of lottery result with the highest expected degree that has already been stored, the expectation degree indicated by the new lottery result is already If it is higher than the expected degree indicated by the most expected lottery result stored, the type of lottery result based on the new winning information and the position of the holding area in which the new winning information is stored are overwritten. It is configured.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in terms of configuration. That is, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the voice lamp. This is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 60A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60A, in addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12B), the RAM 223 in the third embodiment has a high expectation classification flag 223n and a high expectation. The difference is that a position storage area 223p is provided.

The high expectation type flag 223n is a flag that indicates the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the lottery results (variation type) corresponding to each of the held balls. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, it is determined based on the state of the high expectation type flag 223n whether or not the variation type that is the determination target of whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect is suspended ( (See S4432 in FIG. 62). The correspondence between the state of the high expectation level flag 223n and the expectation level will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 60B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the state (value) of the high-expectation-degree flag 223n and the expectation. As shown in FIG. 60(b), the high expectation type flag 223n has a configuration in which five states of 00H to 04H can be set. As shown in FIG. 60B, the value “00H” of the high-expectation degree type flag 223n corresponds to “long deviance” and “short deviance”, which are the variation types having the lowest expectations, and is “01H”. “Corresponds to “normal reach out”, which is a variation type having the second lowest expectation (the fourth highest). Further, the value “02H” of the high expectation type flag 223n corresponds to “super-reach out” which is the fluctuation type having the third lowest (third highest) expectation degree, and “03H” is the expectation degree. Corresponds to “special reach out”, which is the second highest (fourth lowest) variation type.

The value “04H” of the high-expectation-degree flag 223n corresponds to “various hits” (per special reach, super-reach, normal reach) with the highest expectation. That is, in the third embodiment, when the lottery result is a big hit, the same expectation is set regardless of the variation type. This is to suppress a situation in which the continuous announcement effect is interrupted and a big hit occurs during the continuous announcement effect. In other words, if you make a difference in the degree of expectation to the variation type of the jackpot, the start prize corresponding to the jackpot of the variation type of low expectation occurs first, and then it corresponds to the jackpot of the variation type with high expectation When the start winning is generated, the high-expectation-degree flag 223n and the high-expectation-position storage area 223p described below may be updated based on the big hit of the variation type having high expectation. That is, when a plurality of holding balls corresponding to the jackpot are held at the time when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, the jackpot holding based on the start winning detected temporally later indicates whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. There is a possibility that it will be subject to judgment. In this case, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, the continuous announcement effect is executed until the jackpot variation display based on the start winning that is detected later in time, so it is detected earlier in time. Even if the jackpot variation display based on the addition introduction prize is set, the notice effect is set. Therefore, since a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display in which the fluctuation is started earlier, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand as if the continuous notice effect was executed to notify the big hit. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the variation type corresponding to the jackpot is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of expectation, and the starting prize corresponding to the jackpot is newly detected in the state where the reserved ball corresponding to the jackpot already exists. Also, the high-expectation-degree flag 223n and the high-expectation-position storage area 223p described later are configured not to be updated based on the variation type corresponding to the new start winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the situation in which a big notice hits in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the continuous notice effect is restarted again after the big hit can be prevented (suppressed). Can be more clearly understood by the player. Therefore, a more easy-to-understand effect can be realized.

The high expectation type flag 223n is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (see S4326 in FIG. 61 and S4436 in FIG. 62). In addition, each time the prize information command is received (that is, each time a new start prize is detected), the variation type indicated by the prize information command and the variation with the highest expected degree in the hold indicated by the high expectation degree type flag 223n. If the expected degree of the variation type indicated by the prize information command is higher, the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is a value corresponding to the expected degree of the variation type newly notified by the prize information command. Is updated to (see S4324 in FIG. 61). Then, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released and it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect up to the variable display based on the data of the holding area indicated by the high expectation position storage area 223p is executed. Is set (see S4434 in FIG. 62).

Here, although illustration is omitted, in the third embodiment, the expected contents of all the variation types that are jackpots are the same (“04H”), and the specified contents of the advance notice selection table 222b are also described. The common determination value is configured to be referred to regardless of the variation type for the variation type to be a big hit. That is, for example, in the first embodiment, when the variation type based on the new starting winning is “per super reach”, the determination value (see 222b2 in FIG. 13) used to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is In the third embodiment, the configuration is used for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed for all the variation types corresponding to the jackpot.

In addition, when the variation type based on the newly detected start winning is a jackpot variation type, the determination value used to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is not limited to this. The determination value (222b3 in FIG. 13) used for the determination in the case of the normal reach in the first embodiment may be used, or a range of the determination value not specified in the advance notice selection table 222b in the first embodiment is used. It may be configured. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The description will be continued by returning to FIG. The high-expectation position storage area 223p is located at the position of the holding area in which the variation type with the highest expectation (that is, the variation type of the expectation indicated by the value of the high-anticipation type flag 223n) is withheld among the reserved balls. It is a storage area for storing corresponding data. Specifically, if the holding area in which the holding ball corresponding to the variation type having the highest expectation is held is the holding first area, "01H" is stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p, If it is the reserved second area, "02H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p, and if it is the reserved third area, "03H" is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. If it is the reserved fourth area, “03H” is stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. The high expectation position storage area 223p is reset (set) to the initial value "00H" when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined (that is, when the announcement lottery is prohibited) (Fig. 61 S4326, FIG. 62 S4436). In addition, each time the prize information command is received (that is, each time a new start prize is detected), the variation type indicated by the prize information command and the variation with the highest expected degree in the hold indicated by the high expectation degree type flag 223n. If the expected degree of the variation type indicated by the prize information command is higher than the type, the value corresponding to the reserved area in which the data corresponding to the prize information newly notified by the prize information command is stored is high. The expected position storage area 223p is overwritten (see S4325 in FIG. 61). When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released and it is decided to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect up to the variable display based on the data in the holding area indicated by the high expectation position storage area 223p is executed. Is set (see S4434 in FIG. 62).

As described above, in the third embodiment, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the lottery result with the highest expectation are stored in the notice lottery prohibited state. The reserved area is configured to be comprehensible based on the value of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. As a result, in the determination as to whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect that is executed when the announcement lottery prohibition state is released, the continuous announcement effect is simply made at the determination ratio (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the high-expectation degree type flag 223n. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute, and it is not necessary to perform complicated control such as determining the variation types of all the reserved balls one by one. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. Furthermore, the holding area in which the data corresponding to the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation is stored can be easily specified based on the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p. The process for specifying the range of the reserved ball for executing the continuous announcement effect can be realized by simpler control. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the processing load between the cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibited state and the setting of the continuous advance notice effect.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. First, the winning information command process 3 (S4231) in the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

The prize information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) is a process executed instead of the prize information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the prize information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. Similarly to the above, it is a process for analyzing the received winning command and determining the execution of the continuous announcement effect.

Of the winning information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, the respective processings of S4301 to S4311 are the same as the respective processings of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. The same processing is executed. Further, in the winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4304 that the advance notice production prohibition flag 223h is turned on (S4304: Yes), the high expectation type flag. 223n is read (S4321), and the expected degree indicated by the read high expectation degree type flag 223n is compared with the expected degree of the variation type indicated by the received winning information command (S4322). Then, it is determined whether or not the expected degree corresponding to the variation type notified by the newly received winning information command is the higher expected degree (S4323), and the newly notified variation type is the higher expected degree. If it is determined to be (S4323: Yes), the high expectation type flag 223n is updated to a value (see FIG. 60(b)) corresponding to the expected degree of the variation type notified by the prize information command this time. (S4324).

After the processing of S4324, the high expectation position storage area 223p is overwritten with a value corresponding to the type of the holding area (one of the holding first to fourth areas) storing the data notified by the prize information command this time. (Store) (S4325), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4323, when it is determined that the newly notified expected degree of the variation type is less than or equal to the expected degree indicated by the high expectation type flag 223n (S4323: No), the processes of S4324 and S4325 are performed. The process is skipped and the process is finished as it is.

Further, in the winning information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) in the third embodiment, after the process of S4310 is finished (that is, after the continuous notice effect is set), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation type flag are set. Both the degree position storage area 223p is reset to the initial value (S4326), and the process proceeds to S4311.

By executing this prize information command processing 3 (see FIG. 61), every time the prize information based on the new starting prize is received in the advance notice lottery prohibited state, all of the new reserved balls based on the prize information are also included. It is possible to re-determine the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the holding balls and the stored holding area. Therefore, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation of the reserved balls and the stored holding area are set to the high expectation type flag. It can be easily determined based on the value (state) of 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from the release of the advance notice lottery prohibition state to the completion of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect, so that the continuous advance notice effect setting process can be executed more preferably.

Next, the details of the stop command processing 3 (S4232) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The stop command process 3 (S4232) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment, and the stop command process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 35). Similar to ), determine whether it is the timing to cancel the advance notice lottery prohibited state, and if it is the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibited state, whether or not continuous notice production can be executed based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls This is a process for determining.

Of the stop command processing 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are the same as the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processes as the processes of S4401 to S4404, S4409, S4411, S4412, and S4415 are executed. Further, in the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4404 ends, the high-expectation level flag 223n is read (S4431), and the value of the read high-expectation level flag 223n ( It is determined whether or not the (state) is "00H" (S4432). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold ball, which is the determination target of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, is included in the hold.

In the process of S4432, if the value of the high-expectation degree type flag 223n is “00H” (S4432: Yes), the variation type with the highest expectation degree in the hold is “long deviant” or “short deviant”, This means that there is no holding ball that is a determination target of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in the hold, and therefore, this processing is ended without executing the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. On the other hand, in the processing of S4432, when it is determined that the value of the high expectation type flag 223n is not “00H” (S4432: No), the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is “next”. 02H” or more (S4433), and when it is determined to be “01H” (S4433: No), the hold ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation is stored in the hold first area. Since it means that the notice effect cannot be executed over a plurality of variable displays, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4433, when it is determined that the data stored in the high-expectation position storage area 223p is “02H” or more (S4433: Yes), the determination target of whether or not the continuous notice effect is executable is determined. Since it means that the variation type that becomes “Hold” is included in the hold and that the variation type is held in the hold second area and thereafter, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. Specifically, the notice selection table 222b is read (S4409), and the continuous notice effect is executed based on the read notice selection table 222b and the variation type corresponding to the value (state) of the high expectation type flag 223n. Whether or not it is possible is determined (lottery) (S4434), and the process proceeds to S4411.

Further, in the stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4412 is completed, the value stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p is set as the value of the advance notice number counter 223i (S4435). ), the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage area 223p are both reset to the initial value "00H" (S4436), and the process proceeds to S4415.

By executing this stop command process 3 (see FIG. 62), when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is performed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. Whether or not it can be easily determined. Further, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it is possible to easily specify the range of the holding area for which the continuous announcement effect is set based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. it can. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load from the cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibited state to the end of the setting of the continuous advance notice effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment will be described. The notice effect setting process 3 (S4531) in the third embodiment is a process executed in place of the notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in the first embodiment, and the notice effect setting process in the first embodiment ( Similar to (see FIG. 37), this is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect is set for the variation display started based on the variation pattern command this time, and for setting it, the announcement effect is set.

In the advance notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, the processes in S4601 to S4607 are the same as the advance notice effect setting process (see FIG. 37) in S4601 to S4607 in the first embodiment. The same processing is executed.

Further, in the notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63) in the third embodiment, when the process of S4604 or S4607 ends (that is, in the case of the fluctuation start timing during the notice lottery prohibited state), the next high It is determined whether the state (value) of the expectation type flag 223n is "00H" (S4621), and if the value is other than "00H" (S4621: No), the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is set to 1 Updating is performed by subtraction (S4622), and this processing ends. As a result, a new variable display start is set, and as the data of each holding area is shifted, the position (holding area) where the holding ball corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation is stored (holding area) is set. The data shown (data in the high-expectation position storage area 223p) can be updated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4621, when it is determined that the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is “00H” (S4621: Yes), the processing of S4622 is skipped and this processing is directly terminated. If the state of the high expectation type flag 223n is "00H", in the current notice lottery prohibited state, the prize information command process 3 (see FIG. 61) has not been executed even once, or the prize information command process 3 In the process of S4233 (see FIG. 61), it means that the variation type corresponding to the new winning information has never been determined to have a higher expectation, so that the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is not included. Is still the initial value "00H".

By executing this notice effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 63), the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p is actually stored in the prize information each time a new variation display is set in the notice lottery prohibited state. The data in the area 223a can be linked and updated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the type of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest degree of expectation among the lottery results based on all the reserved balls during the advance notice lottery prohibited state and its A holding area in which a holding ball corresponding to a lottery result with high expectation is held can be grasped by the state of the high expectation type flag 223n and the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. There is. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the type (type) of the lottery result (variation type) with the highest expectation among the reserved balls and the stored holding area are set to the high expectation type. The determination is made based on the value (state) of the flag 223n and the data of the high expectation position storage area 223p.

With this configuration, when the notice lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the state (value) of the high expectation type flag 223n. it can. That is, a simple process as compared with the case where the variation type of each holding ball is individually determined from all the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the variation type having the highest expectation is specified. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the MPU 221 when the announcement lottery prohibited state is released. Further, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, it is possible to easily specify the range of the holding area for which the continuous announcement effect is set based on the data stored in the high expectation position storage area 223p. it can. That is, the processing of searching the holding area in which the data corresponding to the variation type that is the determination target of the execution of the continuous announcement effect is stored is omitted, and the data stored in the high-expectancy position storage area 223p is simply omitted. Since it can be replaced by a simple process of reading, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the range of the reserved ball that is the target of the continuous announcement effect.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is notified by the winning information command, and when the notice lottery prohibited state is canceled, the lottery corresponding to the jackpot is held in the reserved balls. When the result is on hold, whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed is determined by the same determination value regardless of the variation type corresponding to the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the first embodiment, the rate at which execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined according to the variation type may be different according to the variation type.

In the present third embodiment, based on two types of information, that is, the value of the high-expectancy level flag 223n and the data stored in the high-expectancy level storage area 223p, the advance lottery prohibition state is continuously released. Although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the notice production, the configuration is not limited to this. Only one of them may be provided in the RAM 223, and it may be configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed in combination with the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a. With this configuration, the storage capacity of the RAM 223 can be reduced.

In the third embodiment, the winning information notified by the winning information command is stored in the empty area of the winning information storage area 223a, but the winning information storage area 223a may be deleted. Normally, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on only the winning information notified by the winning information command. In the announcement lottery prohibited state, the high expectation type flag 223n and the high expectation position storage are set. This is because it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect when the notice lottery prohibited state is released, based on only the data stored in the area 223p. By deleting the winning information storage area 223a, the capacity of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68. In the above-described first embodiment, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided, by setting the advance notice lottery prohibition state, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the duplicate determination of the continuous announcement effect. .. When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum of the data stored in the respective holding areas of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated at the time of the release, and the continuous advance notice production is executed based on the logical sum. It is configured to judge whether or not it is possible. That is, based on the logical sum data, whether or not the holding ball includes a holding ball of a variation type that is a determination target of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, and the fluctuation with the highest degree of expectation among the current holding balls. The type is determined. Then, when the variation type that is the determination target of whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executable is included, the availability of the continuous announcement effect is determined at the determination rate (lottery probability) corresponding to the variation type with the highest expectation ( The lottery) was adopted.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set not only when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined but also when the big hit occurs. Then, even when the jackpot is over, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data is calculated, and the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in consideration of the variation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low expectation. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot is over, even though the continuous announcement effect is set for the holding ball with low expectation, the continuous announcement effect is not set for the pending ball with high expectation, or the continuous announcement effect is set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation is consumed on the way and a reserved ball with a low degree of expectation is consumed in the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in configuration is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Is. Regarding various electrical configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 64, a change over time in the lottery (judgment) state of the continuous announcement effect after the jackpot is won in the fourth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, when the jackpot is won and the jackpot start timing (start timing of the opening period) is reached, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set. As a result, during the jackpot, the determination (lottery) as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is not executed even if the start winning is detected. In the example of FIG. 64, the case where two starting winnings (winning a and winning b) are detected during the big hit is shown. However, when the winning a is detected and the winning b is detected, a notice is also given. Since the lottery prohibition state is set, the determination as to whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the notice lottery prohibited state continues even when the jackpot ending period is reached, and the notice lottery prohibited state is released when the ending period ends (that is, when the jackpot finish timing comes). It When the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the contents (variation type) of the reserved balls (prize a and prize b) that were held during the big hit and the reserved balls that were already held when the big hit started Based on this, it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. That is, similarly to the case where the advance notice lottery prohibited state in the first embodiment described above is released, the logical sum of the data stored in the respective holding areas of the winning information storage area 223a is calculated, and the highest expectation is obtained. Specify the fluctuation type. Then, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed with a lottery probability (determination rate) according to the variation type having a high expectation.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not continuous notice production can be executed by taking into account the variation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot, so that a reserved ball with a higher degree of expectation It is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set on the basis of the reserved ball having a low degree of expectation even though it is being held. If it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect each time the start winning is detected until the execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided during the jackpot execution as in the normal time, the variation type with low expectation After deciding to execute the continuous announcement effect for the starting prize of, there is a possibility that the starting prize of the variation type having a high degree of expectation is detected. In this case, the continuous announcement effect that starts from the change immediately after the jackpot ends continues up to the variation type with low expectation, and the variation display with high expectation is executed immediately after the end of the continuous announcement effect, so the game There is a possibility that the reliability of the continuous announcement production by the person may be reduced. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, since the notice lottery prohibition state is set during the big hit, even if the continuous notice effect is set to the pending ball with low expectation immediately after the big hit ends, Regardless, the situation that the high-expectation hold ball does not have the continuous announcement effect set, or the high-expectation hold ball is exhausted in the middle of the continuous announcement effect, and the low expectation is displayed at the last fluctuation display of the continuous announcement effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the holding balls are digested. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

Although illustration is omitted, if the continuous announcement effect has already been set when the jackpot start timing is reached, the setting of the continuous announcement effect is temporarily cleared when setting the announcement lottery prohibited state. It is configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot from ending with the setting of the continuous notice production before the jackpot start remaining, so it is more reliable, between the holding ball at the time of jackpot winning and the jackpot. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after the big hit, in consideration of all the increased types of fluctuations of the reserved balls.

In the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot start timing is reached, the setting of the continuous announcement effect that has been set before the jackpot is started is cleared. The timing of clearing is not limited to this, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the configuration of clearing the continuous announcement effect may be cleared based on the detection of the first start winning in the jackpot. With such a configuration, for example, when the start winning is not detected during the big hit, the setting of the continuous announcement effect before the start of the big hit can be used as it is as the setting after the big hit. In other words, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, it is possible to prevent the wasteful process of determining again whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed for the same reserved ball as before the jackpot start. The processing load of the lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the command determination processing 4 (S4131) in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This command determination process 4 (S4131) is a process that is executed instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment described above, and is similar to the command determination process (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment. Further, it is a process for performing control according to the command received from the main controller 110.

Of the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216, the command determination processing (see FIG. 33) in the first embodiment is performed. The same processes as the processes of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, and S4216 are executed.

Further, in the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the status command is received in the processing of S4209 (S4209: Yes), the gaming status is determined according to the gaming status indicated by the status command. A status command process for updating the data in the storage area 223g is executed (S4231), and this process ends. Details of this status command processing (S4231) will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In addition, in the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is received in the processing of S4211 (S4211: Yes), the winning information command processing in the first embodiment ( 34), the winning information command process 4 is executed (S4232), and this process ends. The details of the winning information command process 4 (S4232) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67. On the other hand, in the processing of S4211, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is next determined whether the command received from the main control device 110 includes the opening command (S4233). ), if it is determined that the opening command is received (S4233: Yes), first, the notice effect inhibition flag 223h is set to ON (S4234). Accordingly, the advance notice lottery prohibited state can be set at the time when the big hit opening period is started.

When the process of S4234 ends, next, the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is reset to 0, and the notice type flag 223k is reset to the initial value "00H" to reset the setting of the continuous notice effect. (S4235), the opening command for display is set (S4236), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4233, if it is determined that the opening command is not received (S4233: No), the process proceeds to S4213.

Further, in the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the stop command is received in the processing of S4213 (S4213: Yes), the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) is replaced. The cancellation determination process is executed (S4237), and the process proceeds to S4215. This determination process at the time of cancellation (S4237) determines whether or not the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, and when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released, whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed according to the variation type of each reserved ball Is a process for determining. Details of this release time determination processing (S4237) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, details of the above-described status command processing (S4231) will be described. As described above, this state command process (S4231) is a process for updating the data in the game state storage area 223g according to the game state indicated by the state command.

In this state command processing (see FIG. 66), first, the data stored in the game state storage area 223g is updated according to the game state indicated by the received state command (S4801), and then the current state command , It is determined whether or not the state command is output at the end of the jackpot (S4802). That is, it is determined whether or not the state command is the state command set by the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As described above, in the status command composed of 1-byte data, the lower 2 bits are data indicating the gaming status. That is, the least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not the symbol is a time saving state, and the second least significant bit is a bit indicating whether or not the special symbol is in the probability variation state. In the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined bit other than the lower 2 bits (for example, the most significant bit) is on, it indicates that the state command is output at the end of the big hit, and when it is off, the big hit Indicates that the status command was output at a time other than termination. That is, in the process of S1015 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the lower 2 bits of data of the state command are set according to the gaming state after the jackpot, and a predetermined bit is set. Generate a state command with (eg, most significant bit) set to on. As a result, in the process of S4802, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the state command is output at the end of the jackpot, simply by determining whether or not a predetermined bit (for example, the most significant bit) is on.

In the process of S4802, when it is determined that the state command is output at the end of the big hit (S4802: Yes), it means that the end timing of the big hit, so the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j is set to ON (S4803). ), the above-described cancellation determination process is executed (S4804), and this process ends. By setting the advance notice prohibition release flag 223j to ON in the process of S4802, in the release time determination process (S4804), the hold ball that was held at the start of the jackpot and the hold that was newly acquired during the jackpot execution. It is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the variation type of the ball. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the release time determination process (the release time determination process, which is exactly the same process when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is finished and when the jackpot is finished ( (See FIG. 68) is used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. As a result, the description of the control program can be simplified as compared with the case where it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in a separate process depending on the trigger for canceling the announcement lottery prohibited state. Therefore, the workload of the developer at the time of development can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the process of S4802, when it is determined that the status command received from the main control device 110 is not the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: No), the processes of S4803 and S4804 are skipped and the process is continued. This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the details of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) described above will be described. As described above, the prize information command process 4 (S4232) is a process executed instead of the prize information command process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment.

Of the winning information command processing 4 (S4232) in the fourth embodiment, each processing of S4301 to S4311 is the same as each processing of S4301 to S4311 of the winning information command processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment. The process is executed.

In addition, in the winning information command processing 4 (see FIG. 67) in the fourth embodiment, after the processing of S4301 is completed, a hold corresponding to the jackpot before the starting winning that triggered the output of the winning information command this time. It is determined whether or not the ball is already held (S4331). More specifically, the data of the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and each of the holding areas are read out, and at least one data corresponds to a big hit. ) Is determined. That is, the logical sum of all the reserved areas other than the reserved area in which the data based on the current winning information command is stored is calculated, and it is determined whether at least one of the upper 3 bits is on.

In the processing of S4331, when it is determined that the holding ball corresponding to the jackpot has already been held (one of the upper 3 bits of the logical sum is on) (S4331: Yes), the holding based on the current start winning prize. Even if you set a continuous announcement effect that extends to the ball, the continuous announcement effect will be reset due to a big hit in the middle, so the continuous announcement effect will be halfway (for example, continuous over three fluctuations) It should have been set as a notice production, but the first change will result in a big hit). Therefore, in this case, the present process is directly terminated without determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed. On the other hand, in the processing of S4331, when it is determined that the pending ball corresponding to the jackpot is not held (S4331: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the variation type indicated by the winning information command this time. Each processing of S4302 to S4311 for executing is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the details of the above-mentioned cancellation determination processing (S4237, S4804) will be described. This release time determination process (S4237, S4804) is a process for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed and the execution range based on the variation type of each reserved ball when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released. .. That is, this is a process corresponding to the stop command process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. In addition, in the first embodiment, the timing when the advance notice lottery prohibited state can be released is only the timing when the stop command is received. However, in the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery is performed even when the jackpot end timing is reached. The prohibition status is released. Therefore, the name of the process is changed to "discrimination process at release".

Of the determination processing at release (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, each processing of S4401 to S4415 is the same as each processing of S4401 to S4415 of the stop command processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The process is executed. Further, in the determination process at the time of cancellation (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S4403 ends, the variation display being executed next or the variation display executed next is a variation for notifying a big hit. It is determined whether it is a display (S4441). More specifically, the data of the execution area of the winning information storage area 223a and the data of the reserved first area are read to determine which of the areas stores the data corresponding to the variation type of the jackpot. In the processing of S4441, when it is determined that the data corresponding to the variation type of the big hit is stored (S4441: Yes), even if the continuous notice production is set, the notice production is continuously performed over a plurality of variation displays. It means that the jackpot is a big hit before the execution of, and the setting of the continuous notice effect is reset. Therefore, in this case, this process is terminated without determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4441, when it is determined that the variable display in execution and the variable display to be executed next are neither big hits (S4441: No), it is determined whether the continuous notice effect is executable and the execution range. Each processing of S4404-S4415 for performing is performed, and this processing is completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set not only when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined but also when the big hit occurs. Then, even when the jackpot is over, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data is calculated, and the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in consideration of the variation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the execution of the continuous announcement effect from being set based on the reserved ball having a low expectation. Therefore, immediately after the jackpot is over, even though the continuous announcement effect is set for the holding ball with low expectation, the continuous announcement effect is not set for the pending ball with high expectation, or the continuous announcement effect is set. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation is consumed on the way and a reserved ball with a low degree of expectation is consumed in the last variable display of the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the determination process at the time of cancellation, which is exactly the same process, when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released after the execution of the continuous advance notice production is finished and when the jackpot is finished (FIG. 68). It is configured to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed by executing (see). With such a configuration, the description of the control program can be simplified as compared with the case of determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed in a separate process depending on the cancellation trigger of the announcement lottery prohibited state. it can. Therefore, the workload of the developer at the time of development can be reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released at the end timing of the jackpot, and the holding ball that has already been held at the start of the jackpot and the hold based on the newly-started winning award detected during the jackpot. Although it was configured to execute the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after the jackpot is finished from each variation type of the ball, the release timing of the announcement lottery prohibition state and the determination timing of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect are It is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a start winning award is detected during a big hit and the notice lottery prohibition state is released to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed when the number of reserved balls becomes maximum. When the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, the number of reserved balls cannot increase thereafter (that is, the variation type with the highest expectation does not change until the end of the jackpot), so continuous notice production at the end timing of the jackpot This is because it is possible to obtain the same result as that of determining whether or not to execute. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem such as a delay in the timing of starting the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot is over.

In the fourth embodiment, the same case is set when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released based on the end of the jackpot and when the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released based on the end of the continuous advance notice production. Although the release time determination process (see FIG. 68), which is a process, is executed, the same process does not necessarily have to be executed. Separate processing may be prepared. With this configuration, the processing can be made different at the end of the jackpot and at the end of the continuous announcement effect, so that the execution condition of the continuous announcement effect can be made different. Thereby, for example, it is possible to realize a special control such as permitting the execution of the continuous announcement effect only when the winning is finally made after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the condition for canceling the advance notice lottery prohibited state, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69 to FIG. 73, the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the above-described fourth embodiment will be described. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the notice lottery prohibition state is set during the jackpot, and the notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end timing of the jackpot to determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in this modification, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released at a predetermined timing during the jackpot (at the start of the ending period) to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Then, in the jackpot ending effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not the continuous notice effect is started after the jackpot is over. As a result, when the ending effect with a high degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed is executed, the continuous announcement is performed before the variable display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player more strongly expect the production.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the modification of the fourth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment described above in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed. That is, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
First, with reference to FIG. 69(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 69A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 69(a), the ROM 222 in the modification of the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as the ROM 222 in the above-described fourth embodiment (the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(a)). ), an ending selection table 222h is added. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ending selection table 222h is a data table that is referred to when determining the aspect of the ending effect when the jackpot ending period is started. As described above, in this modified example, the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect will be executed after the jackpot is finished is suggested by the aspect of the ending effect. In this modified example, a normal mode (a mode with a low expectation level for execution of the continuous notice effect is executed) at a rate according to the determination result of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the end of the jackpot. ) Or an ending effect of a special mode (a mode with a high degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed) is determined from the ending selection table 222h (see S4910 in FIG. 72).

Details of the ending selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the ending selection table 222h. As shown in FIG. 70, in the ending effect selection table 222h, the range of the value (random number value) of the effect lottery counter 223f in which the normal ending with a low expectation level at which the continuous announcement effect is executed is determined, and the continuous announcement effect are displayed. The range of the random number value (counter value) in which the notice suggestion ending with high expectation to be executed is determined is defined in association with each of the determination results of the notice type and the possibility of execution of the continuous notice effect. Although illustration is omitted, in the normal ending, the background color in the ending effect is set to blue, while in the preliminary suggestion ending, the background color is set to red. With such a configuration, the player can easily identify whether the ending is the normal ending or the trailing suggestion ending by only checking the background color. Therefore, at the start of the jackpot ending period, the player can be expected to play the game with the expectation that the background will be red.

As shown in FIG. 70, "0 to 49" is defined in association with "notice effect A" as a range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to normal ending, and corresponds to notice suggesting ending. "50 to 99" is associated and defined as the range of the random number value (counter value) (see 222h1 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when "notice effect A" is decided in the lottery for determining whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed during the jackpot, 50% of the ratio (50/100) is used as the ending effect of the notice suggestion ending. Is set.

Further, for "preliminary notice effect B", "0 to 24" is defined as a range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to normal endings, and a random number value (counter value) corresponding to advance notice suggesting endings is defined. ) Is defined in association with “25 to 99” (see 222h2 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when the "notice effect B" is determined in the lottery of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect executed during the jackpot, 75% of the ratio (75/100) is used as the ending effect of the notice suggestion ending. Is set. For “preliminary effect C”, “0 to 9” is defined as a range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to normal endings, and the range of random number values (counter values) corresponding to advance warning suggesting endings is defined. “10 to 99” is associated and defined as the range (see 222h3 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when the "notice effect C" is determined in the lottery for determining whether or not the continuous notice effect is executed during the jackpot, 90% of the time (90/100) is the ending suggestion of the notice suggestion ending. Is set.

On the other hand, as a range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the case where the continuous notice effect is not executed after the jackpot (when the continuous notice effect is not executed), "0 to 94" is defined in association with the notice suggestion ending. "95 to 99" is associated and defined as the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to (see 222h4 in FIG. 70). For this reason, when the non-execution of the continuous announcement effect is decided in the lottery of whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executed during the big hit, only 5% (5/100) is set as the ending effect of the big hit. The trailing suggestion ending is not set.

As described above, in the present modification, when the continuous notice effect is not executed, the ratio of the notice suggesting ending set as the ending effect is set to be extremely low (to a rate of 5%). At the time of execution, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for execution of the continuous notice presentation. Further, in the present modification, the higher the expectation degree of a big hit is determined, the higher the determination rate of the notice suggesting ending becomes. That is, in the case of the “announcement effect A”, which has a relatively low expectation of a big hit, the announcement suggestion ending is determined at a rate of 50%, and the “notice effect B” has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the “notice effect A”. In the case of, the notice suggestion ending is determined at a rate of 75%, and in the case of "predictive effect C" having the highest expectation of the jackpot, the notice suggestion ending is determined at a rate of 90%. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the “preliminary effect C” has been determined when the preliminary suggestion ending is executed. That is, when the trailer suggestion ending is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be further increased, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the aspect of the ending effect.

In this modification, the background color is different between the normal ending and the trailing suggestion ending during the execution of the ending production, but this is only an example, and the player normally ends and the trailer suggestion is performed. It is possible to set an arbitrary effect mode within a range in which it can be distinguished from the ending. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending production may be different between the normal ending and the trailing suggestion ending (for example, the character "Matane!" The character "Chance!" may be displayed in the ending, or the character displayed during the ending production may be different (for example, a female character may be displayed in the normal ending, and a male character may be displayed in the trailer suggestion ending). Etc.). Further, it is not limited to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 that the mode is different between the normal ending and the trailer suggestion ending. For example, the music played during the ending effect is changed, or the illumination is changed. By changing the light emission color and the light emission pattern of the parts 29 to 33, the presentation mode may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggesting ending.

Further, in the present modified example, as the mode of the ending effect, only two types of the normal ending and the trailing suggestion ending are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which four types of ending effect modes are provided, each of which has a high selection rate when the notice effect A is executed after the jackpot, and a type which has a high selection rate when the notice effect B is executed, respectively. Alternatively, it may be set as a type having a high selection rate when the notice production C is executed and a type having a high selection rate when the continuous notice production is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect will be executed but also the type of the announcement effect that is likely to be executed during the ending period from the ending effect mode. , A game can be played while paying attention to the ending effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 69(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 69(b), the RAM 223 in the present modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment (the same as the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 12(b))). The difference is that the determination non-execution flag 223q is added. Since other configurations are the same as those in the above-described fourth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The determination-unexecuted flag 223q is a flag indicating whether or not it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed at the start of the ending period. If the determination non-execution flag 223q is ON, it indicates that the execution availability of the continuous announcement effect has not been executed at the start of the ending period, and if it is OFF, it indicates that the execution availability of the continuous announcement effect has been determined. ..

Here, in this modified example, it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to the upper limit value (4) at the start of the ending period. If it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit, then a new starting prize is detected during the execution of the ending effect, and the variation type of the new starting prize is , If the expected degree is higher than the variation type of each holding ball for which the continuous announcement effect has already been set, a situation occurs in which the variation display with a high expected degree is executed immediately after the continuous announcement effect ends. ..

Therefore, in this modification, the number of held balls is accumulated up to the upper limit value at the start of the ending period, and only when there is no possibility that the status of the held balls will change during the ending period, it is determined whether or not continuous notice production can be executed. It is configured to do. Then, if it is not determined whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect at the start of the ending period, whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect is determined at the end of the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect in consideration of the variation types of all the reserved balls that are held at the end of the jackpot, so that the continuous announcement effect is preferably executed. be able to.

The determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON when it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executable at the start of the ending period (see S4908 in FIG. 73), and it is determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. In this case, it is set to off (see S4812 in FIG. 72).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, details of the command determination processing 5 (S4141) will be described with reference to FIG. The command determination process 5 (S4141) is a process executed in place of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 65) in the fourth embodiment, and is the same as the command determination process 4 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 65). Similarly, it is a process for performing control according to the command received from the main controller 110.

Of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237, the command determination processing in the fourth embodiment is performed. The same processes as the processes of S4201 to S4209, S4211, S4213, S4215, S4216, and S4232 to S4237 of the process 4 (see FIG. 65) are executed.

Further, in the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4209 that the status command is received (S4209: Yes), the status command processing in the fourth embodiment. Instead of (see FIG. 66), the status command process 5 is executed (S4241), and this process ends. Details of this status command processing 5 (S4241) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 71) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S4233 that the command received from the main control device 110 does not include the opening command ( (S4233: No), it is determined whether the command received from main controller 110 includes an ending command (S4242). Then, in the process of S4242, when it is determined that the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S4242: Yes), the ending command process for selecting the mode of the ending effect is executed (S4243), and The process ends. Details of this ending command processing (S4243) will be described later with reference to FIG. 73.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the above-mentioned status command processing 5 (S4241) will be described. This state command processing 5 (S4241) is similar to the state command processing (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment, data in the game state storage area 223g according to the game state indicated by the state command received from the main controller 110. Is a process for updating.

Of the status command processing 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, in each processing of S4801 to S4804, each processing of S4801 to S4804 of the status command processing (see FIG. 66) in the fourth embodiment. The same process as is executed.

Further, in the state command process 5 (see FIG. 72) in the modification of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S4802 that the current state command is the command output at the end of the jackpot (S4802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the determination non-execution flag 223q is on (S4811), and if the determination non-execution flag 223q is on (S4811: Yes), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed at the start of the ending period. Since it indicates that it has not been executed, the judgment non-execution flag 223q is set to OFF (S4812), and then each processing of S4803 and S4804 for judging whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed is executed, and this processing is ended. To do. On the other hand, in the processing of S4811, when it is determined that the determination non-execution flag 223q is off (S4811: No), whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed because the number of the reserved balls has reached the upper limit number at the start of the ending period. Since it has already been determined, the processing of S4812, S4803, and S4804 is skipped, and this processing is directly terminated.

By executing this state command process 5 (see FIG. 72), even if it is not determined whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be performed at the start of the ending period, the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be performed can be performed at the end of the jackpot. Therefore, in each big hit, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed, depending on the holding ball that was held at the start of the big hit and the variation type of the holding ball that was increased during the big hit.

Details of the ending command processing (S4243) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 73. As described above, this ending command processing is processing for selecting the ending effect mode.

In this ending command processing (see FIG. 73), first, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is read (S4901), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 4 (S4902). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit value. In the process of S4902, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is 4 (S4902: Yes), the holding balls corresponding to the variation type having a higher expectation may increase during the ending period. Therefore, each process of S4903 and S4904 for determining whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed is executed. That is, the notice prohibition cancellation flag 223j is set to ON (S4903), the cancellation determination processing is executed (S4904), and the processing proceeds to S4905. Note that this release-time determination processing is exactly the same as the release-time determination processing (see FIG. 68) in the fourth embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is larger than 0. That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined in the release time determination processing (S4904), and the value corresponding to the continuous number of the announcement effects is set in the announcement number counter 223i. In the processing of S4905, if it is determined that the counter value of the notice number counter 223i is greater than 0 (S4905: Yes), the effect type of the continuous notice effect determined this time is specified from the state of the notice type flag 223k. Then, (S4906), in the ending selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), the range of the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the effect type specified in the process of S4906 is compared with the value of the effect lottery counter 223f (S4907). ).

Next, the ending type (either the normal ending or the trailing suggestion ending) corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f is determined from the comparison result by the process of S4907 (S4910), and the determined ending type is notified to the display control device 114. A display ending command for setting is set (S4911), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4902, when it is determined that the value of the read special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is less than 4 (S4902: No), it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. , There is a possibility to detect the start winning corresponding to the variation type with higher expectation during the ending period (execution of continuous notice production based on the variation type with the highest expectation pending at the end of the jackpot) Since it may not be possible to determine whether or not it is possible, the determination non-execution flag 223q is set to ON (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. Also, in the process of S4905, when it is determined that the value of the notice number counter 223i is 0 (that is, the execution of the continuous notice effect is not decided) (S4905: No), the process proceeds to S4909. ..

In the process of S4909, in the endin selection table 222h (see FIG. 70), a range of random number values (counter value) corresponding to non-execution of the continuous announcement effect (see 222h4 in FIG. 70) and the counter value of the effect lottery counter 223f. And (S4909), the process proceeds to S4910, and the ending type is determined and the ending command for display is set in the same manner as when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined.

By executing this ending command processing (see FIG. 73), the ending presentation mode can be selected at a rate according to the determination result of whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect, so the continuous announcement effect is given to the player. It is possible to indicate the presence/absence of execution of, and the degree of expectation according to the type of notice.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released at a predetermined timing during the jackpot (at the start of the ending period) to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. I am trying. Then, depending on the mode of the ending effect of the big hit, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not the continuous notice effect is started after the end of the big hit. As a result, when the ending effect with a high degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect is executed is executed, the continuous announcement is performed before the variable display of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player more strongly expect the production.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the background color during the execution of the ending effect is made different between the normal ending and the trailing suggestion ending, but this is merely an example, and the player normally ends. It is possible to set an arbitrary presentation mode within a range in which it can be distinguished from the trailing suggestion ending. Specifically, for example, the characters displayed during the ending production may be different between the normal ending and the trailing suggestion ending (for example, the character "Matane!" The character "Chance!" may be displayed in the ending, or the character displayed during the ending production may be different (for example, a female character may be displayed in the normal ending, and a male character may be displayed in the trailer suggestion ending). Etc.). Further, it is not limited to the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 that the mode is different between the normal ending and the trailer suggestion ending. For example, the music played during the ending effect is changed, or the illumination is changed. By changing the light emission color and the light emission pattern of the parts 29 to 33, the presentation mode may be different between the normal ending and the notice suggesting ending.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, only two types of the ending effect, that is, the normal ending and the trailing suggestion ending are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which four types of ending effect modes are provided, each of which has a high selection rate when the notice effect A is executed after the jackpot, and a type which has a high selection rate when the notice effect B is executed, respectively. Alternatively, it may be set as a type having a high selection rate when the notice production C is executed and a type having a high selection rate when the continuous notice production is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to predict not only the degree of expectation that the continuous announcement effect will be executed but also the type of the announcement effect that is likely to be executed during the ending period from the ending effect mode. , A game can be played while paying attention to the ending effect. Also, instead of or in addition to these, the expectation that the jackpot is included in the holding ball that was held at the end of the jackpot and the holding ball that was newly detected during the jackpot based on the winning prize The configuration suggested by the embodiment may be adopted. In this case, instead of suggesting the degree of expectation, a mode of ending effect that is selected only when a big hit is included may be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the aspect of the ending effect.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls has reached the upper limit value (4) at the start timing of the ending period, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is canceled to determine whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed. Although the determination is made, the release timing of the advance notice lottery prohibited state and the determination timing of whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed are not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to detect whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed when the winning award is detected during the big hit and the number of reserved balls reaches the maximum, even if it is not the start timing of the ending period. With such a configuration, at the start timing of the ending period, only the selection process of the mode of the ending effect needs to be executed, and the timing of determining whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect can be different. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 at the start timing of the ending period can be reduced, so that the selection of the mode of the ending effect is delayed, the execution of the ending effect is delayed, or the continuous notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the mode corresponding to the determination result of the propriety cannot be normally selected.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. In the above-described first embodiment, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 (arrangement of nails, arrangement of windmills, etc.) is substantially bilateral, and the flow provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game board 13 is the same. A game ball is launched by a game ball launched toward the road (right-handed game ball) and a game ball launched toward the flow path provided on the left side (left-handed game ball) The period from when the game is played to when it reaches the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is configured to be substantially the same.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the game ball (right-handed game ball) launched toward the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13 is on the left side. It is configured such that the period until it reaches the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning device 65 is longer than that of the game ball (left-handed game ball) fired toward the flow path provided in .. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, in the case where the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the variable display device unit 80 is more likely than the game ball flowing down the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The game balls that flow down the flow path provided on the left side are configured to have a higher rate of entering the specific winning opening 65a.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration that the board configuration of the game board 13 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, the first embodiment is described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a board surface configuration of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 74, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment is different from that of the game board 13 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2) in the variable display device unit in the game board 13. On the right side of 80, a detour accessory 700 that allows play balls to enter the inside is provided. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, this detour accessory 700 lengthens the time until the right-handed (launched on the right side of the game board 13) gaming ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a. It is provided for. In other words, the detour compound 700 is until the gaming ball fired by right-handing reaches the specific winning port 65a, rather than the period until the gaming ball fired by left-handing reaches the specific winning port 65a. The flow time of the right-handed game ball can be made longer so that the time becomes longer. In the fifth embodiment, the period until the left-handed game ball reaches the specific winning opening 65a is 1 second to 2 seconds, whereas the right-handed game ball is the specific winning opening 65a. It is configured such that the period until reaching (1) reaches 7 seconds to 8 seconds.

Here, with reference to FIG. 75, the details of the bypass accessory 700 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the bypass agent 700. As shown in FIG. 75, the bypass accessory 700 is provided with an opening 710 in its upper portion. The game ball shot by right-handing can enter the inside of the bypass agent 700 through the opening 710. In addition, an opening 720 is provided in the lower part of the bypass compound 700 for discharging the game ball flowing down in the bypass compound 700 to the outside of the bypass compound 700. Further, in order to prevent the sphere that has advanced inward from being discharged to the outside without passing through the opening 720, the bypass member 700 is provided with the peripheral portion 730 to the front side, the rear side, and the left-right direction in front view. It is surrounded by 4 directions. Since this peripheral portion 730 is made of a semitransparent member (for example, PS material), the player can easily visually recognize how the sphere flows down.

Further, of the peripheral portion 730, the flat surface on the back side in the front view can be assembled so as to be substantially flush with the base plate 60, so that a gap is created between the peripheral portion 730 and the base plate 60. It is possible to prevent the ball from being caught in the gap. Further, the flat surface of the peripheral portion 730 on the front side in front view and the glass unit 16 are configured to come into contact with each other without a gap when the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the sphere from being caught in the gap due to the formation of the gap between and.

As shown in FIG. 75, a plurality of flow paths (guide flow paths 740 to 790) inclined downward from the bypass agent 700 are provided inside the bypass agent 700. In each of the guide channels 740 to 790, the surface with which the sphere is in contact has a substantially flat plate shape, and the width thereof is the width of the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 (the inner wall on the back side in front view and the inner wall on the front side in front view). Distance). That is, a gap is formed between the inner portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 and each of the guide channels 740 to 790, so that the sphere can be prevented from passing through the gap.

As shown in FIG. 75, the guide channels 740, 760, 780 are inclined from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. In addition, the guide flow paths 750, 770, and 790 are inclined from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction. Then, the guide flow paths 740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790 are arranged in order from the upper side of the bypass material 700. That is, the flow channels inclined downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction and the flow channels inclined downward from the upper left direction in the front view to the lower right direction are alternately provided.

The game ball that has entered the opening 710 first drops into the guide flow passage 740, and flows downward in the front left direction along the slope formed by the guide flow passage 740. Then, when the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide channel 740, the game ball falls from the guide channel 740 toward the guide channel 750. Then, the dropped game ball flows down along the guide flow path 750 to the lower right direction in front view. When the flowing down game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow path 750, the game ball falls into the guide flow path 760, and flows down in the lower left direction in a front view along the slope formed by the guide flow path 760.

After that, the game ball alternately repeats the operation of flowing down along the flow path and the operation of dropping to the lower flow path. And finally, the game ball reaches the lower end of the guide flow passage 790 and drops from the lower end of the guide flow passage 790 toward the opening 720. As a result, the ball that has entered the bypass material 700 is discharged to the outside of the bypass material 700 through the opening 720. Each time the flow path of the game ball changes, the direction in which the game ball flows changes (that is, from the lower right direction to the lower left direction, or from the lower left direction to the lower right direction), so the game changes each time the flow path changes. The force (flow velocity) of the ball flowing down can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game ball that has entered the detour accessory 700 through the opening 710 is discharged to the outside through the opening 720. As a result, when the ball is shot to the right side of the game board 13, the ball is lower than the game board 13 to the left side of the game board 13 (the first ball entrance 64 or the variable winning a prize). The time to reach the area where the device 65 is disposed can be lengthened (7 seconds or more).

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the guide flow passages 740 to 790 is rotatably supported by the flow passage supporting shafts 741 to 791, and each of the flow passage supporting shafts is set as a rotation shaft in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. It is configured to be rotatable. In addition, the rotation operation is performed by rotating the rotation stoppers 742a to 792a provided on the lower side of the guide passages 740 to 790 or the lower surfaces of the guide passages 740 to 790 with respect to the rotation stoppers 742b to 792b. It stops by contact. This rotation operation will be described by taking the guide flow path 740 as an example.

As described above, the guide flow passage 740 is configured to be rotatable about the flow passage support shaft 741 as the rotation shaft. This turning operation is performed based on the weight of the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 740. Specifically, when the game ball flows down the upper half of the guide flow path 740, the load due to the weight of the game ball is applied to the upper half of the guide flow path 740, so that the upper half of the guide flow path 740 is directed downward. A force in the direction of turning to is generated. That is, a force acts to rotate the guide flow passage 740 clockwise when viewed from the front, so that the guide flow passage 740 rotates clockwise with the flow passage support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the guide flow path 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742b. The rotation stop member 742b can prevent the guide passage 740 from rotating too much clockwise and the guide passage 740 from tilting in the opposite direction.

Here, the rotation stopping member 742b is a member having a substantially columnar shape, and is joined to the inner wall on the front side and the inner wall on the back side of the peripheral edge portion 730, respectively. That is, the position is not displaced by the impact when the lower surface of the guide flow path 740 contacts. The other rotation stopping members 742a to 792a and the rotation stopping members 752b to 792b have the same structure as the rotation stopping member 742b.

On the other hand, when the ball flows down the lower half of the guide flow passage 740, the load due to the weight of the game sphere is applied to the lower half of the guide flow passage 740, so the lower half of the guide flow passage 740 is rotated downward. Directional force is generated. That is, since a force acts to rotate the guide flow passage 740 counterclockwise in a front view, the guide flow passage 740 rotates counterclockwise with the flow passage support shaft 741 as a rotation axis. The rotation operation is stopped when the lower surface of the guide flow path 740 contacts the rotation stop member 742a. The rotation stop member 742a can prevent the guide passage 740 from rotating too counterclockwise. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the guide flow passage 740 from becoming too large and being unable to reduce the momentum of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to reliably allow the game ball shot by the right hit to flow down to the lower side of the game board 13 (the region where the first ball entrance 64 and the specific winning port 65a are arranged) over 7 seconds or more. .. In addition, when the game ball flows down in a state where the inclination of each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is maximized, each of the guide channels is set so that it takes 7 seconds until the game ball reaches the second entrance 640. The path length of 740 to 790 and the maximum inclination angle are set. Since it is rare for the game ball to flow down with all the guide flow paths 740 to 790 maintaining the maximum inclination angle, the time for the game ball to reach the second entrance 640 is definitely set to 7 seconds or more. be able to.

In this way, by configuring the inclination of each of the guide passages 740 to 790 to change based on the load due to the weight of the game balls, the flow velocity of the game balls flowing down each of the guide passages 740 to 790 is changed. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to vary the time until the gaming ball finishes passing through the bypass article 700. Further, in the above description, the case where one sphere travels on the guide flow passage 740 has been described, but a state in which a plurality of spheres travel on the same guide flow passage may occur during an actual game. In this case, the turning operation of each of the guide flow paths 740 to 790 can be made more irregular, so that it is possible to vary the time until the gaming ball finishes passing through the bypass accessory 700.

Further, as shown in FIG. 75, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 is processed so that the corners at the left and right ends of the lower surface are rounded as compared with the corners at the left and right ends of the upper surface. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the corners of the lower surface and the inner wall portion of the peripheral edge portion 730 to come into contact with each other when each of the guide passages 740 to 790 rotates. Therefore, since each of the guide passages 740 to 790 can be arranged at a position closer to the peripheral portion 730, a gap is formed between each of the guide passages 740 to 790 and the peripheral portion 730, and the game ball is in the gap. It is possible to prevent the game ball from getting caught or the game ball passing through the gap. In addition, each of the guide flow passages 740 to 790 is configured to return to the arrangement having the largest inclination due to its own weight in a state where the game ball does not flow down. For example, when the sphere is not flowing down the guide flow passage 740, the weight of the guide flow passage 740 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the flow passage support shaft 741 as the rotation axis. This rotation operation is performed until the lower surface of the guide flow path contacts the rotation stop member 742a, and is stopped by contacting the rotation stop member 742a. Similarly, the guide flow passages 750 to 790 are configured to perform a rotating operation until they come into contact with the respective rotation stopping members 752a to 792a by their own weight in a state where the game balls do not flow down. As a result, whether the game ball flows down while the guide flow passages 750 to 790 are rotating or whether the game ball flows down after the rotation operation of the guide flow passages 750 to 790 is completed. The flow velocity of the sphere can be changed accordingly. Therefore, it is possible for the player to hardly aim at the second entrance 640.

It should be noted that each of the guide flow passages 740 to 790 may not be rotated by its own weight, but may be rotated only by the passage of the game ball. In addition, for example, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 may be configured to be regularly or irregularly rotated by a motor or the like.

Returning to FIG. 74, the description will be continued. As shown in FIG. 74, below the detour compound 700, a large number of nails are provided so as to restrict the downward direction of the game balls flowing out of the detour compound 700 through the opening 720 on the lower end side of the detour compound 700. Are arranged. With these nails, all the game balls that have flowed out of the bypass goods 700 can be dropped onto the curved surface member 800 provided on the left side in front view with respect to the variable winning device 65 (of the first ball entrance 64). It can be suppressed that the game ball flows down in the direction). The game ball dropped on the curved surface member 800 rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 800 and is guided toward the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 74, since the variable winning device 65 and the curved member 800 are very narrow (the width is less than one game ball), the curved member in the state where the specific winning opening 65a is opened. Almost all the game balls guided to the left end of 800 can be won (balls) to the specific winning port 65a. On the other hand, on the left side of the variable winning a prize device 65 when viewed from the front, a relatively large space (a width exceeding one gaming ball) for guiding the game ball to the outlet 66 below the variable winning device 65. (Flow path) is provided. Therefore, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, when the game ball is shot by left-handed striking, many gaming balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, but some gaming balls (for example, 10 The ratio of one ball to one ball) is guided to the outlet 66 from the left side of the variable winning device 65 without entering the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the bypass member 700 and the curved member 800 are provided in the flow path on the right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front. By these, the period until the game ball hit to the right reaches the specific winning port 65a can be made longer than the period until the game ball hit to the left reaches the specific winning port 65a. Basically, the right hitting takes a longer time to reach the specific winning opening 65a, but the left hitting hits the specific winning opening 65a depending on the reflection direction of the game ball, the ejection state, and the like. The time to reach it may not be long (for example, when a game ball that has been fired to the left is temporarily stopped or when a ball clogging occurs in the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80). etc). Therefore, the gaming ball that has flowed down (passed) through the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is longer than the gaming ball that has flowed down (passed through) the flow path on the left side until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a. In other words, it becomes easy to become longer (the game sphere that has flowed down the left side passage becomes easier to shorten the period until it reaches the specific winning opening 65a).

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the ratio of the right-handed gaming ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the left-handed gaming ball 65a. It can be higher than the rate of entering. As a result, for a player who wants to progress the jackpot game speedily (want to end the jackpot game early), some loss (waste of about one ball out of ten balls) is lost during the jackpot game. The player can play a game by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by striking left with a prepared ball. On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a waste ball (loss) as much as possible, be prepared for a long jackpot game period, and play the game by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing. Can be made. Therefore, since each player can select his or her favorite game property while the jackpot game is being executed, it is possible to realize a game property that matches the taste of each player. In addition, each round of jackpot ends when 30 seconds have passed from the start of each round, or when 10 or more game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a before 30 seconds have passed. To be done. Even if the game balls start to be hit by the right hit after each jackpot round starts, 10 game balls are passed through the detour agent 700 before 30 seconds elapse, and the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to enter (it is possible to enter 10 game balls in about 13 seconds to 14 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage on the prize spherical surface when the player hits the ball to the right (a round ends before a specified number of game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a).

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, a display mode during execution of the jackpot game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the fifth embodiment, when a big hit occurs, substantially rectangular display areas HR2 and HR3 are formed on the upper left side in front view and the upper right side in front view in the main display area Dm. Below the display regions HR2 and HR3, a substantially rectangular display region HR4 having a larger area than the display regions HR2 and HR3 is formed. In the display area HR2, an image simulating a leftward arrow is displayed, and the characters "high-speed mode with left-handed hitting" and "you can quickly hit the jackpot" are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if the player hits the jackpot during the big hit, the big hit can be digested in a relatively short period (the big hit progresses at a relatively high speed). You can

Further, as shown in FIG. 76, in the display area HR3, an image simulating a rightward arrow is displayed, and the words "Right-handed low speed mode" and "You can digest the jackpot carefully". The characters and are displayed. With these display contents, it is easy for the player to understand that if you hit right during a big hit, you can digest the big hit over a relatively long time (the big hit progresses at a relatively low speed). Can be made.

As shown in FIG. 76, various images and information indicating that the jackpot is in progress are displayed in the display area HR4. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 76, an image TB imitating a treasure box containing a large amount of gold coins is displayed in the central portion of the display area HR4, and at the upper right side inside the display area HR4, A display area HR6 is formed with the word "big hit". These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the jackpot game is being executed. A display area HR5 is formed on the upper left side inside the display area HR4 for displaying characters indicating the progress of the big hit (the number of rounds and the number of prize balls paid out). In the example of FIG. 76, the characters “ROUND: 01/16” (information indicating the comparison between the current round number and the maximum round number) and the characters “GET: 0000/1600” (the prize balls up to the present) Information indicating the comparison between the maximum number of payouts and the maximum number of payouts) is displayed. The display content displayed in these display areas HR5 allows the player to easily understand the progress of the jackpot.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the period until the right-handed game ball reaches the specific winning port 65a is longer than the period until the left-hand game ball reaches the specific winning port 65a. It is configured to be long. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the rate at which the right-handed game ball enters the specific winning opening 65a is determined by the left-handed game ball. The ratio is set higher than the rate of entering the ball 65a. With these configurations, for a player who wants to progress the jackpot game speedily (get a lot of prize balls in a shorter time), some loss (1 ball out of 10 balls) is performed during the jackpot game. It is possible to play a game by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by striking left while preparing for a certain proportion of wasted balls). On the other hand, for a player who does not want to generate a useless ball (loss) as much as possible, be prepared for a long jackpot game period, and aim at the specific winning opening 65a by right-handing the game. Can be done. Therefore, since each player can select his or her favorite game property while the jackpot game is being executed, it is possible to realize a game property that matches the taste of each player.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, by providing the detour accessory 700 on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the game ball shot by right hitting reaches the variable winning device 65 is left hitting. It is configured such that the game ball fired by is longer than the period until it reaches the variable winning device 65. That is, by making the path length when the game ball fired by right hitting flows down longer than the path length when the game ball hit by left hitting flows down, it is better to hit right The flow-down time is longer than that of hitting, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known clune means may be provided in place of the bypass member 700 in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period from reaching the clune means to passing through the clune means, so that it is possible to lengthen the flow-down time of the game ball shot by right-handed hitting. Further, for example, instead of the bypass accessory 700, an accessory for stopping the flow of the game ball for a predetermined period may be provided in the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the base plate 60 may be provided. Of these, by configuring the right side of the game board 13 with a substance having a higher friction coefficient than the left side (for example, an elastic body such as rubber), the flow speed of the game balls flowing down the right side of the game board 13 is the base plate 60. May be configured to be easily decelerated by friction. Further, instead of the bypass member 700, the left flow path of the variable display device unit 80 and the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80 are different from each other by differently arranging the nails. It may be configured such that the period until it reaches the lower region (the region where the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) of the game board 13 is longer than when it flows down the road.

In the fifth embodiment, in the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit, the playability when left-handed and the playability when right-handed are displayed area HR2 and display area HR3, respectively. Although it is configured to be displayed on the contrary, it is not limited to this. For example, during a big hit, it may be configured to display only an image that prompts left-handed hitting, or may be configured to display only an image that prompts right-handed hitting. Since the jackpot can be ended in a short time by displaying only the image for prompting left-handed hitting, a large amount of prize balls can be acquired in a short time. Therefore, the interest of the player can be improved. Further, by displaying only the image that prompts the player to hit the ball to the right, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls (game balls that enter the outlet 66 without entering the specific winning opening 65a). The player's profit in the jackpot can be increased.

Further, in the case of notifying the player of the firing direction during the big hit, the firing direction to be notified may be different according to the type of the big hit, the type of effect executed during the big hit, and the like. More specifically, for example, in the case of a probability jackpot, execute a variable display effect in which the main symbols with odd numbers (probability variable symbols) are aligned (a performance mode that is executed only when a probability jackpot is achieved). Whether or not to execute a variable display effect (an effect mode that is always executed when a big jackpot is normally achieved) in which main symbols (normal symbols) with even numbers are arranged is configured by a lottery. Then, if it is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and if an effect in which normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery, it is configured to execute an effect that informs whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot during the jackpot. .. In this case, a production mode for informing whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot (for example, a production in a mode in which it is not known whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot until the final round of the jackpot) To the player (ie, an operation means such as a button or a lever that can be operated by the player). May be provided to determine the effect mode corresponding to the operation content), and the effect mode may be selected in the first round. Then, in order to secure a longer time for selecting the effect mode, in the first round of the big hit (big hit of the normal symbol notification) notified by the variable display effect in which the normal symbols are aligned, a configuration suggesting a right hit May be With this configuration, it is possible to secure a longer period for allowing the player to select an effect mode, and thus it is possible for the player to more reliably select a desired effect mode. On the other hand, in the case where the player is not prompted to make any selection in the first round (for example, when the big hit is notified by the variable display effect in which the probability variation patterns are aligned), the left hit may be notified during the big hit. .. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the period until the jackpot is finished, so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

In addition, for example, when it is a regular jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and when an effect in which normal symbols are aligned is determined by a lottery, an effect of informing whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot in the first round of the jackpot is executed. In addition, in the effect, an effect (operation effect) that prompts an operation to the operation means may be configured to be executed. More specifically, for example, a push button that can be pressed by the player is provided as the operation means, and an effect of urging the push button to be continuously pressed within a predetermined period is executed. Then, the display mode is changed (for example, the gauge of the indicator is accumulated) according to the number of times the push button is pressed, and the display mode is changed to a specific display mode in association with the pressing (for example, the gauge is changed). It may be configured to notify that the probability is a big jackpot by accumulating up to the maximum of the indicator). In this case, if it is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, and if the effect that the normal symbols are aligned is determined by lottery (when the operation effect is executed), the right hit is notified in the first round of the jackpot. With such a configuration, the round period of one round can be made relatively long, and thus the period for performing the operation effect can be secured longer. Therefore, the effect effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced. On the other hand, when the probability variation jackpot is reached and the effect in which the probability variation symbols are aligned is determined by the lottery (when the operation effect is not executed), the left hit is notified in the first round, so that the jackpot can be achieved. The period until the end can be shortened. Therefore, a large amount of prize balls can be paid out in a relatively short time.

Further, instead of selecting the effect mode when notifying whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot, for example, in the first round, the type of the music (audio effect) played during the jackpot game is set. It may be configured to be selectable, and at least right-handing may be informed during a period for selecting a music (music selection period). More specifically, in the first round of the jackpot, a music selection menu screen for selecting the type of music (production by voice) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On this song selection menu screen, images corresponding to each of a plurality of (for example, 10) songs set in the pachinko machine 10 are displayed. In addition, instead of or in addition to the frame button 22, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an operating means such as a button that can be operated by the player, and is displayed on the music selection menu screen according to the operation content of the operating means. One of the images is configured to be selectable. For example, in the song selection menu screen, images corresponding to each song are arranged in a vertical column, and one image (for example, the image displayed in the center) has a lighted appearance, and other images have a visually unlit appearance. To configure. Further, as the operation means, three types of buttons are provided: a button corresponding to upward movement (upper button), a button corresponding to downward movement (down button), and a button corresponding to decision operation (decision button). To do. Then, by detecting the pressing of the upper button during the music selection period, the image that has been turned on until just before the pressing is switched to the turned off appearance, and the image arranged one above is switched to the turned on appearance. (The one lit visible image moves upward by one). In addition, when it is detected that the down button is pressed, the illuminated visual image is moved downward by one. Further, by detecting the pressing of the decision button during the music selection period, the music corresponding to the image that looks lit at the time of pressing is determined as the music to be played during this big hit. That is, the music is set to be played from the end of the first round to the end of the final round of jackpot. With such a configuration, the player's favorite music can be played during the big hit, so that the player's interest in the game during the big hit game can be further improved.

Under such circumstances, if the left hitting is notified in the first round of the big hit, the first round ends relatively early, and the music selection period also becomes short. Therefore, the music selection period may end before the player selects a favorite music piece by operating the up button and the down button and sets the reproduction by the decision button. On the other hand, the right hitting is notified during the first round (song selection period) of the big hit (the big hit for which the performance of selecting music is decided) for which the music selection period is set. Since the eye round period can be set to a relatively long period, the player searches for a favorite song from the song selection menu screen (operates the upper button and the lower button so that the corresponding image looks like illuminated). It is possible to secure a longer period for making a decision (pressing the decision button). As a result, it is possible to surely select a favorite music piece without hurting the player, so that the convenience of the player when selecting a music piece can be improved. In addition, by configuring to notify the left-handed hit during the first round of a jackpot (a jackpot in which a normal jackpot effect is executed) for which the song selection period is not set, it is possible to prevent the game from being delayed and speed up. You can digest the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of an appropriate firing direction according to the effect mode executed during the big hit.

Furthermore, in the case where an effect (operation effect) that prompts the player to operate the operation means, such as setting a music selection period in the first round, is executed at a predetermined rate when the jackpot is a big hit, the player's past The firing direction notified in the first round may be changed according to the operation status (operation history). More specifically, for example, it is possible to store information (operation history) as to whether or not the player has operated the operation means in the first round of the jackpot in which the operation effect has been set. And when starting the jackpot in which the operation effect is set, based on the stored past operation history, the game is performed over the jackpot in which the operation effect is set a predetermined number of times in the past (for example, 5 times). The player may be informed of a left hit when the player is not performing an operation, and may be informed of a right hit when the player is operating within a predetermined number of jackpots. That is, for a player who tends not to perform an operation even if the operation effect is executed, a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a short time by notifying the left hitting and ending the first round of the jackpot earlier. While realizing the game play that can be acquired, for the player who tends to actively operate during the operation performance, the execution period of the operation performance is extended by notifying the right hit, and the player It is possible to secure a period for performing a sufficient operation on the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability according to the tendency of the player.

In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed ball is a prized spherical surface because the right-handed player has a board surface configuration in which the winning rate to the specific winning port 65a is higher than that of the left-handed player. Although the configuration is slightly advantageous, the configuration for making right-handing advantageous on the award surface is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the game ball fired by right-handed hitting and the game ball fired by left-handed hitting the specific winning port 65a the same, the right side of the specific winning port 65 (that is, left-handed hitting). In addition, a general winning opening with a relatively large number of prize balls (for example, 15) may be provided at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter and the right-handed game ball can enter. That is, in the state where the specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball left-handed basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the gaming balls cannot be entered into the specific winning opening 65a and are out. While flowing down to the mouth 66, the game ball hit to the right basically enters the specific winning opening 65a, and some of the playing balls may enter the general winning opening. With such a configuration, when the player hits the ball to the right, the prize ball obtained by entering the general prize hole is a prize ball due to the jackpot (that is, the game ball has entered the specific prize hole 65a). Since it is given in addition to the award ball), it is more advantageous to hit the ball right during the big hit on the award surface. Therefore, it is possible to make a player who wants to win more prize balls right-handed with the expectation that the period of the jackpot becomes longer. On the other hand, for a player who wants to win a jackpot ball in a shorter period of time, be prepared to make a left hit during the jackpot, with the intention that it will be somewhat disadvantageous than a right hit on the prize spherical surface. You can

In the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is a big hit, the feature when the player hits it right and the feature when it hits it left are displayed in the display areas HR2 and HR3 (see FIG. 76). ), but is not limited to this. For example, at a predetermined position of the game board 13 (for example, in the middle of the flow path on the left side and the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80), a sensor capable of detecting whether it is right-handed or left-handed It may be configured such that detection means such as the above is provided and the direction in which the player shoots the game ball is determined from the detection result by the detection means. Then, the effect during a big hit may be changed according to the determined firing direction. For example, when the right hit is detected, the display area HR2 is turned off and the display area HR3 is turned on. On the other hand, when the left hit is detected, the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned on. The configuration may be such that it looks off. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand what kind of playability the player has selected depending on the shooting direction.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 89. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above, in the game board 13, the flow path provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 has a flow path provided on the right side of the flow path provided when the game ball flows down. In the case where the water flows down, the time taken to reach the area below the game board 13 (the area in which the first ball entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are arranged) tends to be longer, It constituted the path length of the flow path, the flow direction of the game balls, and so on. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (that is, during the jackpot game), the game is performed by hitting the game ball to the right rather than when the game ball is shot to the left. The gaming board 13 having a board surface configuration that facilitates winning (balling) in the specific winning opening 65a at a higher rate when the ball is fired is adopted.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a right variable winning device 650 is provided as a variable winning device that is opened and closed during a big hit. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which the ball can be entered in the first round of the big hit, and a special symbol is changed after the big hit by entering a game ball during the big hit. Granted. On the other hand, the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened after the second round of the big hit, and only a predetermined number of prize balls are given by the game balls entering. Further, the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when left-handed and right-handed, and the details will be described later, but left-handed in the first round. If the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning a prize device 650 increases while the right specific winning opening 650a can enter the ball, the ratio of the reached game ball entering the right specific winning opening 650a Is configured to be low. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning a prize device 650 decreases while the right specific winning opening 650a is ready to enter, but the game that has arrived The ball is configured to have a higher rate of entering the right specific winning opening 650a. By these, the game performance in the first round of the big hit can be made different according to the launching direction of the game ball, so that the player has a desired game property (the rate of entering the right specific winning opening 650a is low. Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls that arrives is large, or a game property in which the number of games reached is small but the entry rate is high).

The differences between the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in structure are that the board surface structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 is different. , And the configuration of the RAM 203 is partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the sixth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 77, in the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment, a curved surface member 810 is provided instead of the curved surface member 800 provided in the game board 13 (see FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment. It is different in that there is. As shown in FIG. 77, the right variable winning device 650 is arranged on a part of the slope of the curved member 810.

The right variable winning a prize device 650 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular right specific winning a prize opening 650a in a substantially central portion thereof. The specific winning opening 650a is normally closed by the opening/closing door 650f1 (that is, it is set in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball), and when the first round of the big hit is started, the opening/closing door 650f1 is classified as the big hit type. It is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern for each. In other words, in the first round of the big hit, the state in which the right specific winning opening 650a can be entered and the state in which it is difficult to enter are switched by a specific switching pattern. Then, while the opening/closing door 650f1 is open (while the player can enter the right specific winning opening 650a), when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a, the gaming state after the jackpot is over. , The probability variation state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (the probability variation flag 203e is set to ON at the end of the big hit). On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the right specific winning opening 650a even once in the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. It is set (100 is set to the value of the hour and hour counter 203f). In other words, it is more advantageous for the player when the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a than when the game ball never enters the right specific winning opening 650a during the big hit. It becomes (the game state after the jackpot is advantageous).

As shown in FIG. 77, the right specific winning opening 650a is arranged along the curved path on the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, so that the game ball that has passed through the bypass member 700 and dropped onto the curved surface member 810 is By rolling along the upper surface of the curved surface member 810, the right specific winning opening 650a can be easily reached. In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the left end of the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 and the left end of the right specific winning opening 650a are arranged on substantially the same horizontal plane. Further, the curved surface member 820 provided below the left side flow path in the game board 13 is configured such that the height of the right end on the upper surface thereof is higher than the height of the left end under the condition of the curved surface member 810. .. Then, as shown in FIG. 77, a plurality of nails are arranged between the curved surface members 820 and 810 so as to form an inclination in a downward direction from the curved surface member 820 toward the curved surface member 810. With these configurations, when the game sphere that has been left-handed and has passed through the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 reaches the upper surface of the curved surface member 820, it rolls on the upper surface of the curved surface member 820 to move the curved surface member 820. Reach the right end. Then, the game sphere ejected from the right end of the curved surface member 820 to the right side in the front view flows down to the lower right direction in the front view while interfering with the nails erected between the curved surface members 820 and 810. Then, the curved surface member 810 reaches the left end. The game ball that has reached the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 from the left side with respect to the curved surface member 810 can easily reach the right specific winning opening 650a by rolling the upper surface of the curved surface member 810 to the right when viewed from the front. You can Therefore, in the first round of the big hit, the game ball can be made to reach the right variable winning device 650 regardless of whether the player hits the ball right or left. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, it is possible to shoot the game ball in the desired direction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the structure of the right variable winning device 650 will be described in more detail. FIG. 78(a) is a front perspective view of the right variable winning a prize device 650 in a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable award winning device 650 is closed (a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650a). FIG. 78(b) is a state in which the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning a prize device 650 is switched from the closed state to the open state (switching from the state where the game ball is difficult to enter the right specific winning port 650a to the state where the game ball can be entered). It is a front perspective view of the right variable winning device 650 in the state.

As shown in FIG. 78(a), in the state where the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, the right variable winning device is provided on the left end of the opening/closing door 650f1 closing the right specific winning opening 650a and the upper surface of the curved member 810. The portion on the left side of 650 (left floor surface 810b) is connected smoothly with almost no step. On the other hand, at the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1, there is a convex portion 650g1 for suppressing the game ball rolling from the left side in front view passing the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 and rolling to the right. It is provided. Since this convex portion 650g1 protrudes from the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1, the game ball rolling on the opening/closing door 650f1 from the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1 is prevented from rolling by the convex portion 650g1 and rolls. Motion stops. As shown in FIG. 78(a), the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1 is inclined downward from the upper right direction in the front view to the lower left direction. Therefore, the game ball whose rolling is prevented by the convex portion 650g1 is opened/closed. The upper surface of the door 650f1 flows downward toward the lower left when viewed from the front. Then, the left floor surface 810b rolls to the left when viewed from the front, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the outlet 66. Note that the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the right variable winning device 650 (rolled along the right floor surface 810a) has a strong momentum of downward flow due to the inclination of the right floor surface 810, so the opening/closing door In the state where 650f1 is closed, it is possible to get over the convex portion 650g1 and flow down to the direction of the outlet 66. In this way, by arranging the right variable winning device 650 in an inclined manner, it is possible to prevent the game balls from accumulating in the upper part of the opening/closing door 650f1 while the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, and to the outlet 66. Can be made to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 78(b), in the first round of the big hit, when the right specific winning opening 650a is switched to a state in which a ball can be entered, the opening/closing door 650f1 that closes the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a, The opening/closing door 650f1 is opened by sliding to the left in the front view. As shown in FIG. 78(b), while the opening/closing door 650f1 is being opened, the game ball that has rolled from the right side in front view can enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but rolls from the left side in front view. The moving game ball is blocked by the convex portion 650g1 and becomes difficult to enter the right specific winning opening 650. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 79, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 and the left floor surface 810b have substantially the same height (almost smoothly connected). Therefore, the game ball rolling from the left side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the flow down direction of the game balls that have reached the right variable winning device 650 when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning device 650 is closed and opened will be described. .. First, FIG. 79A is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning a prize device 650 and the curved surface member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened. As shown in FIG. 79(a), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the heights of the upper end of the convex portion 650g1 provided at the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1 and the left floor surface 810b are substantially the same. Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left direction in front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can easily pass through the convex portion 650g1. That is, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right specific winning opening 650a without being hindered by the convex portion 650g1. In addition, with respect to the game ball that has rolled from the right direction in front view to the variable right winning device 650 (flowing along the right floor surface 810a), a ball (winning) for the right specific winning opening 650a is hindered. Since there is no, it is possible to easily enter (win) the right specific winning opening 650a.

FIG. 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right variable winning device 650 and the curved member 810 in a state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. As shown in FIG. 79(b), when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed, the right specific winning opening 650a is closed by the opening/closing door 650f1, and thus the game ball cannot enter. In this state, the game ball that has rolled to the right variable winning a prize device 650 from the left side when viewed from the front has gravity acting downward in the lower left direction due to the upward inclination formed by the opening/closing door 650f1. Therefore, the momentum of rolling is reduced. Further, since the convex portion 650g1 protruding upward from the other part of the opening/closing door 650f1 is provided at the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1, the momentum of the rolling toward the right is temporarily strong, and the opening/closing door 650f1 is almost closed. Even if it is possible to climb up, the convex portion 650g1 prevents the right floor surface 810a from reaching. Therefore, it flows down in the lower left direction along the inclination of the opening/closing door 650f1, and falls from the left end of the curved surface member 810 toward the out port 66.

On the other hand, the game ball that has rolled from the right direction when viewed from the front with respect to the right variable winning device 650 is in a state in which sufficient momentum for overcoming the convex portion 650g1 is added due to the inclination formed by the right floor surface 810a. Therefore, it is possible to get over the convex portion 650g1 and pass through the opening/closing door 650f1. As a result, the curved member 810 can be dropped from the left end toward the outlet 66.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80 and FIG. 81, an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 650f1 (the right specific winning opening 650a) in the first round of the jackpot will be described. Here, in the sixth embodiment, in the first round of jackpot, the jackpot type (jackpot A6) in which the right specific winning opening 650a is set to be able to enter for a relatively long period, and a relatively short period The jackpot type (jackpot B6) set to a possible state is provided. When the state in which the ball can be entered becomes long, the chances of letting the game ball enter the right specific winning opening 650a increase, so the state in which the game state after the jackpot ends is advantageous (the special symbol is in a changed state, and the time reduction of the ordinary symbol is short). State) is likely to be set. Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot A6 is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot B6 (the gaming state after the jackpot is likely to be advantageous). Hereinafter, for simplification of description, the opening pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a set in the first round of the big hit A6 is referred to as a V winning open pattern, and the right specifying set in the first round of the big hit B6. The opening pattern of the winning opening 650a is referred to as an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult.

FIG. 80(a) is a diagram showing a change over time in the state of the right specific winning opening 650a in the case where the V winning open pattern (the opening pattern set in the first round of the big hit A6) is set. .. When the V winning openable pattern is set, first, the right specific winning opening 650a is kept closed for 1.5 seconds from the start of the first round. Then, when 1.5 seconds have elapsed, the right specific winning opening 650a is switched from the closed state to the open state. As shown in FIG. 80(a), it takes 0.3 seconds from the start of the opening operation of the right specific winning opening 650a until the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened. For this reason, when 1.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round, it is in a completely opened state. This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds, and when 0.2 seconds has elapsed (that is, 2.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round), the closing operation of the right specific winning opening 650a is started. .. Similar to the opening operation, this closing operation is completed in 0.3 seconds (completely closed 2.3 seconds after the start of one round). When the right specific winning opening 650a is completely closed, the state where the right specific winning opening 650a is closed continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have elapsed (that is, 2.8 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened again. In this opening operation, the same operation as the first opening operation is repeated. That is, it is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, the opened state is maintained for 0.2 seconds, and closed for 0.3 seconds.

Even after that, it is completely closed for 0.5 seconds and opened for 0.8 seconds (the right specific winning opening 650a is completely opened for 0.3 seconds, and the opened state is 0.2 seconds). A series of operations of maintaining and closing for 0.3 seconds) is repeated. By this repeating operation, in the V winning open pattern, the opening operation for 0.8 seconds is repeated 6 times in the first round of the big hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the final opening/closing operation is executed after 8.0 seconds have elapsed from the start of the first round. Here, in the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment, a detour agent 700 for increasing the flow time of the game ball is disposed in the flow path on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. .. When the game ball hit to the right passes through the detour object 700, a region below the game board 13 (a region in which the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the right variable winning device 650, etc. are arranged) The period until reaching () is 7 seconds to 8 seconds as in the fifth embodiment. Therefore, when the right hitting is started in the first round of the big hit, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 over a time period of at least 7 seconds from the start of the round. Therefore, when the player hits the ball to the right, the game ball reaches the right variable winning device 650 before and after the start of the last opening period (8 seconds after the start of the first round) in the V winning open pattern. .. Therefore, when the player hits the ball right in the first round, it is possible that the game ball can be inserted into the right specific winning opening 650a only in the last opening period of the six opening periods. is there.

On the other hand, if you continue to hit left in the first round of jackpot, the area under the game board 13 (first entrance 64, variable winning device 65, right variable winning device) in about 1 to 2 seconds. Since the game ball reaches the area (where 650 are equally arranged), if the player makes a left-handed stroke immediately at the start of the first round, the game ball can reach the specific winning opening 650a from the first opening period. it can. That is, it is possible to obtain a maximum of six opportunities to enter the right specific winning opening 650a. However, as described above, the game ball rolling from the left toward the right specific winning opening 650a is one open period (completely closed after the opening is started compared to the game ball rolling from the right. The time period during which the player can enter the right specific winning opening 650a is shortened in 0.8 seconds until the game starts. Furthermore, when left hitting is performed, the number of game balls that cannot reach the right variable winning device 650 is larger than when right hitting is performed. That is, when the game ball cannot reach the curved surface member 810 and enters the outlet 66 by slipping between the plurality of nails that are planted between the curved surface member 820 and the curved surface member 810, or 1 There is a case of entering the entrance 64. Therefore, when a V winning open pattern is set, by hitting left in the first round, the number of game balls that reach while the right specific winning opening 650a is open is large. The game rate becomes low, and the number of wasted balls increases. On the other hand, when the right hit is performed in the first round of the jackpot, the number of game balls that reach while the right specific winning opening 650a is opened is small, but the ratio of entering the ball is high. Becomes Therefore, the playability of the first round can be changed according to the shooting direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the first round of the big hit can be improved. It is to be noted that the possibility of a game ball entering during one round is almost the same (for example, a ratio of about 80%) regardless of whether the player hits right or left in the first round of the jackpot. As described above, the opening period and the board surface configuration are set.

FIG.80(b) is a figure which shows the time-dependent change of the state of the right specific winning a prize mouth 650a, when the open pattern (open pattern set in the 1st round of big hit B6) where V winning is difficult is set. is there. When an opening pattern that makes it difficult for V winning is set, as shown in FIG. 80(b), the right specific winning opening 650a is opened at the same time as the start of the first round, and is closed immediately after being completely opened. It Therefore, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the right specific winning opening 650a while the right specific winning opening 650a is open, regardless of whether the player hits left or right. The probability that a game ball will enter during one round is almost 0%). Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is possible to expect the player to expect that the jackpot type will be the jackpot A6 (the opening pattern allowing the V winning is set).

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing in more detail the state of the opening/closing door 650f1 during the opening period of 1 when the V winning openable pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 81, until the opening operation is started, the upper part of the right specific winning opening 650a is closed by the opening/closing door 650f1, so that the game ball is placed against the right specific winning opening 650a. The ball cannot be entered (see FIG. 81(a)). Then, at the opening start timing of the opening/closing door 650f1, the opening/closing door 650f1 slides in the left direction when viewed from the front, and is housed inside the curved surface member 810. When 0.1 second has elapsed from the start of the opening operation, the width of the part of the right specific winning opening 650a which is not closed by the opening/closing door 650f1 becomes the width of one game ball or more (FIG. 81). (See (b)). As a result, the game ball rolled from the right direction can enter the right specific winning opening 650a. On the other hand, the game ball rolling from the left direction is moved to the right by the convex portion 650g1 and the upward slope formed by a portion of the opening/closing door 650f1 that is not housed inside the curved surface member 810. It is prevented from entering the specific winning opening 650a. That is, the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter the right specific winning opening 650a, as in the state where the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. The state in which the game ball rolling from the right side can enter the right specific winning opening 650a and the game ball rolling from the left side cannot enter is continued for 0.1 seconds. However, when 0.1 seconds elapse (that is, 0.2 seconds elapse from the start of the opening operation), most of the opening/closing door 650f1 is housed inside the curved surface 810 (convex portion 650g1 and left floor surface 810b). The width between the right end is less than one game ball), so that the game ball reaching the right end of the left floor surface 810b passes directly above the convex portion 650g1 without passing through the upper surface of the opening/closing door 650f1. It becomes possible (see FIG. 81(c)). Therefore, the game ball that has rolled from the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the right variable winning device 650 can also pass through the convex portion 650g1 and enter the right specific winning opening 650a. That is, both the game ball that has rolled from the right direction (the game ball that has been launched by a right hit) and the game ball that has rolled from the left direction (a game ball that has been launched by a left hit) are both the right specific winning opening 650a. It is ready to enter. After that, until the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely opened, the game balls that have rolled from both directions (both the right side and the left side) can enter the right specific winning opening 650a.

As shown in FIG. 81, when 0.3 seconds elapses after the opening operation is started, the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely housed inside the curved member 810, and only the convex portion 650g1 is exposed to the outside (opening/closing door 650g1). 650f1 is completely opened) (see FIG. 81(d)). This completely opened state continues for 0.2 seconds as described above, and after 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the closing operation is started. This closing operation is the reverse operation of the opening operation and is executed over the same time (that is, 0.3 seconds). Therefore, during the period from the start of the opening operation until the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed again, the period in which the game ball can enter the right variable winning a prize device 650a is the opening operation at the time of right hitting. It takes 0.6 seconds from the start of 0.1 seconds to 0.1 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. On the other hand, when left-handed, 0.4 seconds elapses from 0.2 seconds after the opening operation starts until 0.2 seconds before the opening/closing door 650f1 is completely closed. That is, the percentage of game balls that have reached the right variable winning device 650 is higher when the player hits the ball to the right than when the player hits to the left.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the period during which the game ball can be played on the right specific winning opening 650a is the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 from the right side or from the left side. It is configured to change depending on whether it is a game ball. Thereby, when the game ball reaches the right variable winning a prize device 650 from the right side, it can be strongly expected to enter the right specific winning port 650a. Furthermore, in the sixth embodiment, as described above, when the player hits the ball to the right, more game balls are transferred to the right variable winning device 650 when the player hits the player to the left in the first round of the big hit. It is configured to reach the other. Therefore, if the left hit in the first round of the big hit, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the right specific winning opening 650a, but it is possible to realize the game property in which there are many opportunities to enter the ball, while the right When the player hits the ball, the game ball easily enters the left specific winning opening 650a, but it is possible to realize the game property in which there are few opportunities to enter the game ball. Therefore, the playability in the first round of the jackpot can be changed depending on the shooting direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the player in the game in the first round can be improved.

In the sixth embodiment, by providing the convex portion 650g1 on the right end of the opening/closing door 650f1, the period during which the game ball rolling from the left side can enter the right specific winning opening 650a is changed from the right side. Although the moving game ball is configured to be shorter than the period in which it can enter the ball, it is not always necessary to provide the convex portion 650g1. Even if the convex portion 650g1 is deleted, the opening/closing door 650f1 rolls from the left side in the middle of the opening operation of the opening/closing door 650f1 (for example, the arrangement shown in FIG. 81(b)) due to the upward slope of the opening/closing door 650f1. It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the right specific winning opening 650a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the first round of the jackpot A6 (jackpot for which an open pattern allowing V winnings is set) in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 82, when the first round of the jackpot A6 is started, the characters "a mode of hitting with a few left hits" and " The number of arrivals is large but it is hard to enter V!" and an image simulating a leftward arrow are displayed. According to these display contents, when the player hits left, more game balls can reach the right variable winning device 650, while it becomes difficult for the game balls to enter the right specific winning opening 650a (V winning. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the game becomes difficult to play.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR3, the characters "one-stroke hit-and-kill mode by hitting right", "there are few arrivals but it is easy to enter V!", and the arrow pointing right is imitated. The selected image is displayed. By these display contents, when the player hits the right ball, the number of game balls reaching the right variable winning device 650 decreases, while the game balls easily enter the right specific winning opening 650a (V winning becomes easy). It is possible for the player to easily understand that he/she becomes sexual.

Further, as shown in FIG. 82, in the display area HR4 of the third symbol display device 81, an image simulating the right variable winning a prize device 650 and the curved surface member 810 is displayed. In addition, a state in which decoration imitating the alphabet "V" is applied is displayed on the front side in front view of the variable winning device 650, and "Aim for V!" is displayed on the upper left side in front view in the display area HR4. The display area HR7 in which the character "!" is displayed is displayed. According to these display contents, a game ball is put into the right variable winning a prize device 650 which is decorated by imitating the letter "V", which is an advantageous result for the player (after the jackpot is over). It is possible for the player to easily understand that the special symbol is in the changed state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 82, with respect to the display region HR4, the right variable winning a prize device 650 is directed to the left side and the upper right side in front view with respect to the image simulating the right variable winning a prize device 650, respectively. The image of the arrow is displayed. The image of the arrow displayed on the left side in the front view with respect to the image simulating the right variable winning device 650 is attached with the character "several hits", and the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side in the front view is attached. The image is marked with the words "One shot kill." According to these display contents, when the player hits left according to the display contents of the display area HR2 (selects a mode in which several hits are made), the game ball is viewed from the front left direction with respect to the right variable winning device 650. It is possible for the player to easily understand that the player is rolling. Further, when the player hits right according to the display content of the display area HR3 (selects the one-hit death mode), the game ball rolls from the right upper direction in front view with respect to the right variable winning device 650. This makes it easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand which direction to pay attention to whether or not the player can check whether the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a.

<Electrical configuration in sixth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 83A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83A, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the sixth embodiment is open to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 9A). The difference is that a pattern table 202aa is added. Further, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b are changed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the fifth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The opening pattern table 202aa is a data table that defines an opening pattern of the right specific winning opening 650a in the first round of the jackpot (either an opening pattern in which V winning is possible or an opening pattern in which V winning is difficult) for each jackpot type. .. The opening pattern table 202aa defines data indicating the start timing of the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 650f1. At the start of the first round of the big hit, the open pattern corresponding to the big hit type is selected from the open pattern table 202aa and set as the open pattern of the first round. By defining the opening pattern (starting timing of opening/closing operation) in the opening pattern table 202aa in advance, the opening/closing door 650f1 can be opened/closed with the same opening pattern in each jackpot.

Next, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83(b). FIG. 83(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, “big hit A6” is set for the range of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 79”. Are defined in association with each other (see 202b1 in FIG. 83). This "big hit A6" has 16 rounds, and an open pattern in which the V prize can be won in the first round of the big hit (a game ball can be put into the right specific winning opening 650a at a rate of about 80%). It is a jackpot type for which an open pattern) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value (random number value) associated with the “big hit A6” is 80, which is “0 to 79”. The proportion of the “big hit A6” being determined when the big hit is 80% (80/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 83(b), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the sixth embodiment, for the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80 to 99", "big hit" B6” is defined in association with each other (see 202b2 in FIG. 83). This "big hit B6" has 16 rounds, and has an open pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize in the first round of a big hit (open pattern in which it is almost impossible to put a game ball into the right specific winning opening 650a). It is a jackpot type that is set. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random number values) associated with the “big hit B6” are 20 “80 to 99”. The ratio of “big hit B6” that is determined when a big hit is 20% (20/100).

In the sixth embodiment, the jackpot type in which the V winning award difficult opening pattern is set is provided, but it is not always necessary to provide the V award winning difficult opening pattern. For example, instead of having a configuration in which an open pattern in which a V prize can be won is always set when a jackpot is hit, the proportion in which the probability variation state is set after the jackpot is set to be the same as in the sixth embodiment is achieved by reducing the V win percentage. You may adjust so that. With this configuration, the number of open patterns can be reduced, so that the amount of data in the open pattern table 202aa can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 84, the RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration (see FIG. 8) of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) described above in the probability variation setting flag 203aa and the probability variation pass. A difference is that a counter 203ab, a winning number counter 203ac, a remaining ball timer flag 203ad, a remaining ball timer 203ae, a probability variation valid flag 203ag, a probability variation valid timer 203ah, and a discharge number counter 203af are added. There is.

The probability variation setting flag 203aa is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state after the big hit game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot game. Here, inside the right variable winning a prize device 650, a probability change switch 650e (not shown) is arranged at a position where a game ball entered from the right specific winning opening 650a always passes. When the output of the probability variation switch 650e is turned on, it is determined that the game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a, and the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to on (S1305 of FIG. 88, FIG. 89). See S1410). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to off at the end of the big hit (see S1205 in FIG. 87). The probability variation setting flag 203aa is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

If the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the probability variation switch 650e before the power-off is cut off, and it can be determined that the game ball has passed. Only in such a case, the probability variation setting flag 203aa may be officially set to be turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch 650e has passed before the power is cut off can be determined by whether or not the probability variation passage counter 203ab described later has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage to the holes by determining an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203aa is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off.

The probability variation passage counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch 650e after the end of one round during the jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 have been discharged in the first round by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203ab and the discharge number counter 203af described later. .. This probability variation passage counter 203ab is updated by adding 1 to it each time the passage of the probability variation switch 650e is detected in a predetermined period after the completion of one round (a so-called pitching period) (see FIG. 89). S1409). In addition, after executing the processing as to whether the number of game balls won in the right specific winning opening 650a and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (S1415 in FIG. 89). The probability variation passage counter 203ab is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The winning number counter 203ac is a counter for counting the number of game balls winning the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 in each round in the jackpot game. .. Specifically, it is detected that the game ball has passed the ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 or the above-mentioned probability change switch 650e provided in the right variable winning device 650. Based on this, the value is incremented by 1 and updated (S1303 in FIG. 88). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of prizes (the total value of the prize number counter 203ac and the probability variation passage counter 203ab) of the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650 and the number of ejected ( After it is determined that the value of the discharged number counter 203af) matches, the initial value is reset to "0" (see S1415 in FIG. 89). The value of the winning number counter 203ac is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, it is set to 0 in the initialized state.

The remaining ball timer flag 203ad is a ball for discharging the remaining game ball when the game ball remains inside the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 at the time when the round is finished. It is a flag that indicates whether or not it is a deadline. When the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, it means that the ball is out of the ball. While the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON, the remaining ball timer 203ae described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1405 in FIG. 89).

The remaining ball timer 203ae has a game ball remaining inside the variable winning a prize device 65 or the right variable award winning device 650 at the time when the specific winning opening 65a or the right specific winning opening 650a is closed after the end of one round. In this case, it is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the remaining game balls has elapsed. The time required until the game ball is discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the sixth embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203ae. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203ae, the number of winnings to the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650 and the number of discharging match. It is determined whether or not there is (S1411 in FIG. 89). If they do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65 or the right variable winning device 650. In addition, it is possible to prevent the illegal act in which the game ball is left unlawfully in the right variable winning a prize device 650, and the game ball is allowed to flow down to the probability variation switch 65e in consideration of the timing of the first round of the big hit.

When the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and when the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set even if the game ball passes through the probability variation switch 650e. The configuration may not be set to ON. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation state from being improperly added.

The discharge number counter 203af is a counter for counting the number of game balls discharged from the variable winning a prize device 65 or the right variable winning a prize device 650 to the outside in each round of the big hit. This discharge number counter 203af passes through a ball discharge port for discharging a game ball from each variable winning device (variable winning device 65 or right variable winning device 650) (provided at the ball discharging port. Each time the ball outlet switch is turned on by the passage of the game ball), the value is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1403 in FIG. 89). After it is determined that the number of balls won in the device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to 0 (S1414 in FIG. 89).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 89, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 85, the jackpot control process 7 (S921) in the sixth embodiment will be described. This jackpot control process 7 (S921) is executed instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 30, S904) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 29). It is a process that is performed.

Of the jackpot control processing 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot control processing (FIG. 30) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is performed in each of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011. The same processes as the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1009 to S1011 of (see) are executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1004 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1004: Yes), the opening according to the round and the jackpot type. The jackpot operation setting process for setting the operation is executed (S1021), and the present process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011 Yes), to set the game state after the jackpot end The jackpot end process is executed (S1022), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot end processing (S1022) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 85) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1011 that it is not the ending timing of the ending effect (S1011: No), the specific winning opening 65a, and the right identification. The winning process for performing the process corresponding to the winning of the winning port 650a is executed (S1023). Details of the winning process (S1023) will be described later with reference to FIG. 88. After the winning process (S1023) is completed, an abnormal process is executed to determine whether the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a has been normally discharged (S1024). This process ends. Details of this abnormality processing (S1024) will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process (S1021) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the big hit operation setting process (S1021). The jackpot operation setting process (S1021) is a process for setting the opening action according to the round and the jackpot type, as described above.

In the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), it is first determined whether or not it is the start timing of the first round (S1101), and if it is not the start timing of the first round of the jackpot (S1101: No). ), the opening of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1105.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S1101: Yes), the open pattern corresponding to the current jackpot type is read from the open pattern table 202aa (S1103). In the process of S1103, if the jackpot type of this time is a jackpot A6, a V winning open pattern (see FIG. 80A) is read, while if the jackpot type of this time is a jackpot B6, it is difficult to win a V prize. The open pattern (see FIG. 80(b)) is read.

When the process of S1103 ends, the start of the release pattern read in the process of S1103 is set (S1104), and the process proceeds to S1105. In the process of S1105, which is executed after the process of S1102 or S1104, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105), and this process ends. By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 86), it is possible to open and close the right specific winning opening 650a in an appropriate opening pattern according to the jackpot type.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1022) will be described with reference to FIG. This jackpot end process (S1022) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. In the jackpot ending process (S1022), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203aa is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203aa is off (S1201: No), It means that no game ball has entered (winning) the right specific winning opening 650a during the big hit, so by setting the value of the time saving medium counter 203f to 100, the game state after the big hit ends. Is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1204.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203aa is on (S1201: Yes), it means that the game ball has entered the right specific winning opening 650a during the big hit this time. By setting the probability variation flag 203e to ON, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the normal symbol time saving state (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1204.

In the process of S1202 executed after the process of S1202 or S1203, a state command for setting the state after the big hit set by the process of S1202 or S1203 to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S1204), The probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to OFF (S1205), and this processing ends. By executing this jackpot ending process (see FIG. 87), an appropriate game state can be set according to the state of the probability variation setting flag 203aa.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1023) will be described with reference to FIG. 88. As described above, the winning process (S1023) is a process for performing a process corresponding to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a. In this winning process (S1023), it is first determined whether or not the current round is in the valid period (S1301). Here, the round valid period is a period during which the round game is set, that is, a period from the opened state of the specific winning port 65a or the right specific winning port 650a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1301, if it is not the round valid period (S1301: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S1301: Yes), then, a prize is awarded to one of the specific winning openings (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a). It is determined whether or not it has been detected (S1302), and when it is determined that the winning in the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is not detected (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1306. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning for the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is detected (S1302: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203ac is updated by adding 1 (S1303). ). Next, it is determined whether or not this round is the first round (S1304), and when it is determined that it is the first round (S1304: Yes), the right specific winning opening 650a is set in the first round of the jackpot. This means that the player has entered (winning) a ball, so the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON (S1305), and the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, in the process of S1304, when it is determined that the current round is not the first round (S1304: No), the process of S1305 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1306.

In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203ac is 10 or more (S1306), and when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is 10 or more (S1306: Yes), and proceeds to the process of S1308 to set the end of this round. On the other hand, in the processing of S1306, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203ac is less than 10 (S1306: No), then it is determined whether or not the round time has elapsed (S1307), and the round time is determined. If the time has elapsed (S1307: Yes), the process proceeds to S1308 and the end of this round is set. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round period has not elapsed (S1307: No), there is no need to end the round, so this processing ends. In the process of S1307, when the current round is the first round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if the end timing of the set release pattern is reached, while in the second and subsequent rounds, When 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

In the process of S1308, closing of the specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a or right specific winning opening 650a) is set (S1308), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning opening is closed is set (S1309). Next, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to ON to set the pitching period (S1310), and this processing ends.

Next, the details of the abnormality processing (S1024) will be described with reference to FIG. 89. As described above, this abnormal process (S1024) is a process for determining whether or not the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a and the right specific winning opening 650a has been normally discharged. In this abnormality processing (S1024), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is the round valid period (S1401), and if it is not the round valid period (S1401: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is in the valid period (S1401: Yes), then whether the game ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (the game ball is discharged from the discharge port for discharging the game ball from each variable winning device) It is determined whether it has been discharged (S1402).

In the process of S1402, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharge number counter 203af (S1403), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if the game ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1402: No), the process of S1403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is on (S1404), and when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is off (S1404: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is turned on (S1404: Yes), it means that the current ball is in the period of removing the ball, so the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is set to 1 Is added to update (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (that is, whether or not the ending timing of the ball spilling period (when 0.8 seconds has elapsed from the end of the round)) (S1406), and the remaining ball timer. If it is determined that the value of 203ae is not the upper limit value (it is not the end timing of the pitching period) (S1406: No), it is determined whether or not the present is the pitching period after the end of the first round. (S1407) When it is determined that it is the pitching period after the completion of one round (S1407: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 650e (S1408), and the probability variation switch. When it is determined that the game ball has not passed 650e (S1408: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1408, when it is determined that the game ball has passed the probability variation switch 650e (S1408: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passage counter 203ab (S1409), and the probability variation setting flag 203aa is set to ON. Then (S1410), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1407, when it is determined that the current ball-spraying period is the ball-spraying period after the second and subsequent rounds are finished (S1407: No), each of S1408 to S1410. The process is skipped, and this process is ended as it is.

In addition, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is the upper limit value (it is the end timing of the pitching period) (S1406: Yes), the discharged number (the discharged number counter 203af is displayed). It is determined whether or not the value) matches the winning number (the total value of the value of the winning number counter 203ac and the value of the probability variation passage counter 203ab) (S1411).

In the processing of S1411, if it is determined that the number of ejected coins does not match the number of winning coins (S1411: No), an error command is set (S1412), and the process proceeds to S1413. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error is displayed) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, while the right specific winning opening 650a is closed, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of causing the probability variation switch 650e3 to pass a game ball.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1411, when it is determined that the number of ejected coins and the number of winning coins match (S1411: Yes), the processing of S1412 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1413. In the processing of S1413, the remaining ball timer flag 203ad is set to OFF (S1413), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203ae is reset (S1414). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203ac, the discharging number counter 203af, and the probability variation passage counter 203ab are reset (S1415), and this processing is ended.

By executing this abnormality processing (see FIG. 89), a ball clogging occurs inside each of the variable winning devices (the variable winning device 65 and the right variable winning device 650), and thus each specific winning port (specific winning port 65a). , And the occurrence of a defect in which the game balls that have entered the right variable winning device 650a) are not normally discharged can be detected and notified at an early stage.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the bonus (prize ball) is given to the player by entering the game ball during the execution of the big hit game (during the special game state). Two types of winning devices, a variable winning device 65 and a right winning device 650, are provided. The right specific winning opening 650a of the right variable winning device 650 is set to an open state in which the ball can be entered in the first round of the big hit, and by the game ball entering during the big hit, in addition to the prize ball, special after the big hit ends The probability change state of the symbol is given. Therefore, whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot is advantageous to the player depends on whether or not the game ball enters the right specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, in the first round of the jackpot, the right specific winning opening 650a is entered. It is possible to make a game pay attention to whether or not a game ball enters.

The right specific winning opening 650a is arranged at a position where the game ball can reach both when left-handed and right-handed, and when the left-handed hit continues in the first round, the right specific winning opening 650a While the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning device 650 increases while 650a can enter the ball, the ratio of the game balls that reach the right specific winning port 650a to the right specific winning port 650a is low. .. On the other hand, if the player continues to hit right in the first round, the number of game balls that reach the right variable winning a prize device 650 decreases while the right specific winning opening 650a is ready to enter, but the game that has arrived The ball is configured to have a higher rate of entering the right specific winning opening 650a. That is, in terms of the number of game balls (the number of opportunities to win to the right specific winning opening 650a) that reach the right variable winning device 650 within a predetermined period (the period until the opening pattern of one round ends) ( Element) is configured so that left-handedness is more advantageous than right-handedness. Further, the surface (element) of easiness of entering the ball (ball entering rate) for the right variable winning device 650 is configured such that the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting. By these, the game performance in the first round of the big hit can be made different according to the launching direction of the game ball, so that the player has a desired game property (the rate of entering the right specific winning opening 650a is low. Instead, it is possible to select either a game property in which the number of game balls that arrives is large, or a game property in which the number of games reached is small but the entry rate is high). Therefore, it is possible to realize the game playability that suits the tastes of more players, and thus it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, in the predetermined period of the big hit (first round), when the right hit is performed, it is advantageous in terms of the ball entry rate as compared to when the left hit is performed (the right). While the game balls that have reached the variable winning device 650a are more likely to enter the right specific winning opening 650a), on the other hand, in the case of left-handed striking, It is configured to be advantageous (more game balls can easily reach the right variable winning device 650a). With this configuration, the player can determine whether to perform right-handed or left-handed by making the advantageous surface and the disadvantageous surface different between when right-handed and left-handed. Although the game playability that can be selected is realized, the difference in superiority between right-handed and left-handed is not limited to this. For example, when a left-handed ball is hit, the game ball is easy to enter (a right-handed ball is hard to enter), but the opening time is short (for example, up to 1 second), but the entry of the game ball is detected. If there are a lot of prize balls to be awarded (for example, 15 per winning ball), a special winning opening is provided, and if a right hit is made, the game ball is easy to enter (it is difficult to enter if a left hit is made). It is also possible to provide a specific winning opening at a position such that the opening time is long (for example, 5 seconds at maximum), but the number of prize balls to be given is small (for example, 3 per winning ball). The specific winning opening to be opened may be alternately switched for each round, and the interval between the rounds may be extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds). By configuring in this way, if you continue to hit left during the big hit, the number of game balls that enter the specific winning opening tends to decrease, but it is given when you enter the specific winning opening It is possible to realize a game in which the number of prize balls is increased. On the other hand, if you continue to hit right during the jackpot, more game balls will easily enter the specific winning opening, but the number of prize balls that will be awarded when you enter the specific winning opening will decrease. Can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play a game by selecting a desired game property. Further, for example, a variable winning device 65 is provided at a position where the game ball is easy to enter when left-handed (difficult to enter when right-handed), and the game ball is entered when right-handed. The right variable winning device 650 is provided at a position where it is easy to hit the ball (it is difficult to hit the ball when left-handed). It may be configured to be shorter than the period. That is, if the player continues to hit the ball right in the jackpot of 1, the possibility of entering the right specific winning opening 650a and providing the probability variation state after the jackpot is high, but the number of prize balls obtained is small. If left-handedness continues, many game balls enter the specific winning opening 65a to obtain a large amount of winning balls, while it becomes difficult to enter the right winning hole 650a. The game state after the big hit may be disadvantageous. Even in the case of such a configuration, the superiority can be made different depending on the firing direction during the big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In this case, the variable winning device 65 (variable winning device in which only a winning ball is awarded to a winning ball) and the right variable winning device 650 (in which a winning ball is awarded to a winning ball and the probability state changes). The position relationship with the variable winning device) that is also given may be reversed. In addition, setting the surface (element) in which the right hit is more advantageous and the surface (element) in which the left hit is more advantageous is not limited to the first round of the jackpot. For example, in a normal game, it may be configured to provide an element in which left hitting is more advantageous than right hitting and an element in which right hitting is more advantageous than left hitting. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a left ball entrance that allows a game ball that is fired by left hitting can enter and a right entrance that allows a game ball that is fired by right hitting can enter. When a game ball enters any of the entrances, a special symbol lottery is executed. And, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, by playing the game by aiming at the right entrance with right-handed, it is advantageous in terms of game efficiency over left-handedness, while when left-handed, the aspect of game efficiency is improved. However, it is more disadvantageous than right-handed, but if you win a big hit, you can easily select a jackpot type (a type that is advantageous in terms of the number of rounds or the continuation rate of the advantageous state) that is more advantageous than right-handed. Good.

In the sixth embodiment, when a right hit is performed in a predetermined period of the jackpot (first round), a game ball that has reached the right variable winning a prize device 650a is specified to the right as compared with a case where a left hit is performed. While making it easy to enter the winning opening 650a, when the left hitting is performed, it becomes easier for more game balls to reach the right variable winning device 650a than when the right hitting is performed. It was composed. In addition to this, the game board 13 may be provided with a sensor or the like that can detect the emitting direction of the game ball in the first round of the big hit. Then, a corresponding effect may be executed according to the firing direction detected by the sensor. More specifically, for example, when a left hit is detected, the display mode of the first round (see FIG. 82) is set such that the display area HR2 is turned on and the display area HR3 is turned off. Then, when right-handedness is detected, the display area HR3 may be turned on and the display area HR2 may be turned off so that the appearance is displayed. With this configuration, the player can more easily understand the playability selected by the accident.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening/closing door 650f1 of the right variable winning a prize device 650 is opened by sliding in the left direction when viewed from the front, so that the game has been rolled from the right side with respect to the right variable award winning device 650. Although the ball is configured such that the period in which it can enter the ball is longer than that of the game ball rolling from the left side, the shape and operation content of the opening/closing door 650f1 are not limited to this. For example, the opening/closing door 650f1 may be configured to be opened from the front side toward the back side when viewed from the front. Then, the length of the opening/closing door 650f1 on the right front side in front view may be configured to be one game ball or more and shorter than the length on the left front side in front view. That is, when the opening/closing door 650f1 is stored on the back side in the front view, the right side of the opening/closing door 650f1 can enter the game ball earlier than the left side, and the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed. May be configured such that, when the opening/closing door 650f1 projects toward the front side in front of the opening/closing door 650f1, the left side of the opening/closing door 650f1 is ready to receive the game ball. Even when configured in this way, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, the game ball rolling from the right side with respect to the right variable winning device 650 enters the ball more than the game ball rolling from the left side. It can be configured such that the possible period is extended.

In the sixth embodiment, the left surface is physically more advantageous than the right hit due to the configuration of the board surface (that is, the game ball that has reached the right variable winning device 650 enters the right specific winning opening 650a). And a surface where right hitting is more advantageous than left hitting (that is, the number of game balls that can reach the right variable winning device 650 during one round). It is not limited. For example, it may be realized in a controlled manner. More specifically, for example, the right specific winning opening 650a is provided at a position where the arrival ratio of the game balls is equal regardless of whether the player hits the ball right or left. Then, in the first round of the jackpot, it is configured to be able to detect whether the player has made a right-handed hit or a left-handed hit, and it is detected that the player is right-handed and that left-handed. The opening pattern may be different depending on the case. That is, when the right hit is detected, the right specific winning opening 650a is opened less frequently, but the right hitting specific winning opening 650a is opened in the opening pattern in which the opening period of each opening is relatively long, while the left hit is detected. In this case, the right specific winning opening 650a may be opened a relatively large number of times, while the opening time of each opening is relatively short. Further, the player may select the game performance of the big hit by operating the operation means such as the button instead of the shooting direction of the game ball.

<Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. In the above-described fifth embodiment, all the game balls that are fired by hitting the right hit are configured to pass through the bypass accessory 700. That is, when the player strikes to the right, it always takes 7 to 8 seconds to flow down to the lower region of the game board 13 (the region where the first entrance 64 and the variable winning device 65 are provided). I was trying. That is, in a normal game state other than during the jackpot game, if the player hits right, the game efficiency is deteriorated.

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, two types of flow paths are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and when one of the flow paths flows down, it passes through the detour compound 700 as in the fifth embodiment. By contrast, while the game ball flows down to the variable winning device 65, if it flows down the other flow path, it is possible to avoid entering the detour accessory 700 and make it difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a. I am trying. That is, a flow path in which the period until the game ball enters one of the entrances (the first entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65, the out opening 66, the general winning opening 63, etc.) is relatively long, Two types are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, that is, a flow path in which a period until a ball enters one of the ball entrances is relatively short. This makes the game play different depending on the shooting direction of the game ball during the big hit (There may be some useless balls, but the playability that allows the jackpot to be exhausted early and the use of waste balls is difficult , A gaming performance in which the digestion period of the jackpot becomes long) can be selected, and it is possible to prevent deterioration of the gaming efficiency in the case of playing the game by right-handing.

The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment in structure is that the board surface structure of the game board 13 is partially changed, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided in the main controller 110. The configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 are partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is partially changed. Is. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the fifth embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 90, a board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, in the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment, the game ball can flow down to the variable display device unit 80 on the right side in front view and to the detour accessory 700 on the left side in front view. It is different from the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment in that a flow path is provided. The difference is that the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the first ball inlet 64 is deleted. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, the flow path in which the bypass material 700 is provided is referred to as a right first flow path, and is viewed from the front side with respect to the variable display device unit 80 in front view and to the bypass material 700. The flow channel provided on the left side in front view is referred to as a right second flow channel.

As shown in FIG. 90, a normal entrance (through gate) 67 through which a game ball can pass is provided above the right second flow path, and the game ball can pass through the normal entrance 67. Thereby, similar to the fifth embodiment and the like, a lottery for normal symbols is executed. As shown in FIG. 90, the character "GO" is attached to the normal entrance 67. Below the normal entrance 67, a second entrance 640 into which a game ball can enter is provided. When a game ball enters the second ball inlet 640, a special symbol lottery is executed, as in the case where the game ball enters the first ball inlet 64. It should be noted that the special symbol lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) executed based on having entered the first entrance 64, and the execution based on entering the second entrance 640 With the special symbol lottery that is performed (second special symbol lottery), the proportion of winning the jackpot is the same regardless of the state (whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or the special symbol is in a changed state). Is configured to be. On the other hand, the jackpot type that is determined when the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is different depending on whether the jackpot is the jackpot due to the lottery for the first special symbol or the jackpot due to the lottery for the second special symbol. (See FIG. 92(a)). More specifically, the jackpot type with a larger number of rounds is easier to be determined when the jackpot is the jackpot in the second special symbol than the jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol It is configured. As a result, the jackpot in the second special symbol can be made to be more joyful than the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery.

The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a capable of performing an opening operation in the right direction when viewed from the front. While the electric accessory 640a is closed (in a state of standing in the vertical direction), the game ball that has flowed into the right second flow path cannot enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, while the electric accessory 640a is open (in a state of being tilted to the right when viewed from the front), most of the game balls that have flowed into the right second flow path enter the second entrance 640. Sphere becomes possible. This electric accessory 640a is changed to an open state under the same conditions as the electric accessory 64a of the fifth embodiment and the like. More specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, if the winning in the normal symbol is a lottery, the opening period of "0.2 seconds x 1 time", and the number of times of opening is set, while the normal symbol In the time-saving state, the opening period of “1 second×2 times” and the number of times of opening are set when the winning symbol is won in the ordinary symbol lottery. In addition to this, in the same manner as the fifth embodiment, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 30 seconds, while in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is 3 seconds. It becomes very short. Therefore, when the game method of launching the game ball aiming at the right second flow path in the normal state of the normal symbol is performed, it is almost impossible to insert the game ball into the second ball inlet 640 (the game ball is wasted. On the other hand, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the game method of aiming the right second flow path to shoot the game balls frequently (the number of game balls shot and the second entry ball). A game ball can be inserted into the second ball entrance 640 so that the number of prize balls paid out by having entered the mouth 640 becomes substantially equal). Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (probably changing state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, or the low probability state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol), the right second By continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the flow path, it is easy to determine the jackpot type (jacket type with a relatively large number of rounds) that is advantageous when it becomes a jackpot. It can be executed continuously without reduction. On the other hand, in the normal state of the normal symbol, most of the game balls are wasted even if aiming at the right second flow path, so by launching the game ball aiming at the first entrance 64 by left-handing. You need to play a game. Even if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, the disadvantageous jackpot type (the jackpot type with a relatively small number of rounds) is easily determined, and the more the ball is left-handed, the more balls are held. Therefore, it is possible to make the game more strongly expected to be in the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

An outlet 66 is provided below the second entrance 640. When the game ball enters the outlet 66, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without awarding a prize ball. With this outlet 66, it is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming clogged in the right second flow path. In addition, as shown in FIG. 90, in the right second flow path, before the game ball enters into any of the entrances (the second entrance 640 or the exit 66), the game is played. There is almost no structure that obstructs the flow of the ball (varies the direction of travel or slows it down). Therefore, compared to the right first flow path, the period from the launch of the game ball to the ball entering any of the ball entrances becomes extremely short (for example, about 1 second). Therefore, a game can be efficiently played by aiming at the right 2nd flow path and shooting a game ball.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal entrance 67 and the second entrance are provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in addition to the right first flow path in which the bypass member 700 is provided. The right second flow path in which 640 is provided is provided. The second entrance 640 is in a state in which a normal symbol time saving state is set during the game state, so that it is easy to enter (the electric accessory 640a is easily opened), so in the normal state of the normal symbol, left strike In a high probability state of a normal symbol, you can make a right hit. That is, even in the presence of the bypass object 700, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of switching the direction in which the game ball is shot according to the game state during the normal game (the game state other than during the big hit game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a display state in a game state in which a time saving state of a normal symbol is set (probability change state of special symbol, and time saving state of ordinary symbol, and low probability state of special symbol, and time saving state of ordinary symbol) It is the figure which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the front view upper side in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (above the display area in which the variable display of the third symbol is executed) ), the horizontally long substantially rectangular display region HR8 is formed. For this display area HR8, as shown in FIG. 91, "aim for "GO" by hitting the right!" !! "," and an image imitating the arrow pointing to the right are displayed. With these display contents, by hitting the game ball to the right with a launch strength (firing speed) that passes through the normal entrance 67 (through gate) 67 to which the character “GO” is attached, It can be easily understood that the game ball can be entered into the second entrance 640 as well.

In the seventh embodiment, by firing the game ball with a firing strength of 85% to 100% (that is, by rotating it to a position of 85% to 100% of the movable range of the operation handle 51), the right side. The game ball can flow into the first flow path, and the game ball is fired at a firing strength of 60% to 90% (that is, rotated to a position of 60% to 90% of the movable range of the operation handle 51). By this), the game ball can flow into the right second flow path. Here, when the game ball is fired in the range of 85% to 90% of the firing strength, it is possible to flow into the right first flow path or the right second flow path depending on the repulsion direction of the game ball or the like. There is a nature. Further, when a game ball is fired with a firing strength of 60% to 65%, it may flow into the right second flow path and may flow into the left flow path of the variable display device unit 80. .. On the other hand, when the game ball is shot within the range of the emission intensity of 91% to 100%, the game ball flows into the right first flow path almost certainly. Further, when the game ball is shot within the range of the firing strength of 66% to 84%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the right second flow path. In addition, when the game ball is fired with a firing strength of 25% to 59%, the game ball almost certainly flows into the flow path on the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, when the game ball is fired with a firing strength of less than 25%, the return ball prevention member 68 cannot be exceeded, so the game ball is not fired in the game area.

<Electrical Configuration in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment is the first type selection in comparison with the configuration of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 9A) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). The specified contents of the table 202b are only partially changed. As shown in FIG. 92(a), in the first hit type selection table 202b in the seventh embodiment, the lottery when the jackpot is won is the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. Different jackpot types are defined depending on whether or not there is one.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the first special symbol, for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 4", as the jackpot type. “Big hit A7” is defined in association with each other (see 202b1 in FIG. 92(a)). This "big hit A7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit ends is set to the probability change state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter values (random number values) associated with "big hit A7" are five, which are "0 to 4". The ratio (probability) at which "big hit A7" is determined when a big prize is won in the special symbol lottery is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the big hits by lottery of the first special symbol, for the value range of the first hit type counter C2 is "5-59", the big hit type is "big hit B7". Are associated with each other (see 202b2 in FIG. 92A). This "big hit B7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit ends is set to the probability change state of the special symbol, and the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, although the number of rounds is smaller than "big hit A7", the gaming state after the big hit ends is the most advantageous gaming state, which is a jackpot type relatively advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the 55 (5 to 59) counter values (random number values) associated with the "big hit B7" are the first. The proportion (probability) of determination of "big hit B7" when a big prize is obtained in the special symbol lottery is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the big hits by lottery of the first special symbol, for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit C7". Are associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 92A). This "big hit C7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is eight, and the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability state of a special symbol, and a time saving state of a normal symbol. That is, since the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the jackpot is over is also a disadvantageous state, the “bonus C7” is the most disadvantageous jackpot type. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value (random number value) associated with "big hit C7" is 40, which is "60 to 99". The ratio (probability) at which the "big hit C7" is determined when the special design lottery results in a big win is 40% (40/100).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the big hits by lottery of the second special symbol, for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 59", the big hit type is "big hit D7". Are associated with each other (see 202b4 of FIG. 92A). This "big hit D7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16 rounds, and the gaming state after the big hit ends is set to the specially changed state of the special symbol, and the regular symbol is shortened. That is, similar to the "big hit A7", the big hit type is the most advantageous to the player in terms of the number of rounds and the gaming state after the big hit. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value (random number value) associated with “big hit D7” is 60, which is “0 to 59”. If the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the proportion (probability) of determining "big hit D7" is 60% (60/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 92(a), among the jackpots by the lottery of the second special symbol, for the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60 to 99", the big hit type is "big hit E7". Are associated with each other (see 202b5 in FIG. 92A). This "big hit E7" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 16, and the gaming state after the big hit is a low probability state of a special symbol, and a time saving state of a normal symbol. That is, although the number of rounds is the largest, the gaming state after the jackpot is a jackpot type that is set to a relatively unfavorable gaming state. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value (random number value) associated with the “big hit E7” is 40, which is “60 to 99”. When the special symbol is drawn in the lottery, the percentage (probability) of determining "big hit E7" is 40% (40/100).

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is achieved in the lottery for the first special symbol, a 95% ratio of eight rounds (a relatively small number of rounds) of big hits (big hit B7 and big hit C7) Is determined, and the jackpot (big hit A7) of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) is determined only at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the case of a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol, the jackpot (one of the big jackpot D7 and the big jackpot E7) of 16 rounds (a relatively large number of rounds) is determined at a rate of 100%. There is. As a result, it is easier to determine a large number of rounds when the second special symbol lottery is a big jackpot than the first special symbol lottery is a big jackpot, so the second special symbol lottery is a big hit. In this case, it is possible to make the player have a higher expectation.

In addition, the method of making the big hit by the lottery of the second special symbol more advantageous than the big hit by the lottery of the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to the number of rounds, the proportion of the jackpot type in which the special symbol is in a probability changing state after the jackpot is finished may be configured such that the jackpot by the lottery of the second special symbol is higher. Good. In addition, for example, as the number of time saving in the case of a normal jackpot, it may be configured such that the number of time saving of the second special symbol is larger.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 92(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment) (see FIG. 8) in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In place of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2, and instead of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the first special symbol holding ball The difference is that the number counter 203c1 and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 are provided.

The first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a1 is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the first entrance 64, and the second special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a2 is It is a storage area for storing various counter values acquired at the timing of entering the second entrance 640. The first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a1 and the second special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a2 have the same configuration as the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment), respectively. There is. That is, it has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop type selection counter C3. Each value of is stored. When the special symbols are selected by lottery, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 are shifted to the execution area (see FIG. 11) ( It is moved), and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed. On the other hand, when each counter value is not stored in the holding first area of the second special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a2 (when the holding sphere of the second special symbol is 0), the first special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the holding first area are shifted (moved) to the execution area (see FIG. 11) and the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area. Based on, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed. That is, in the seventh embodiment, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol.

The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning). It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (variable display performed by the symbol display device 81) (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times, and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is a ball entering the second ball entrance 640. The maximum number of reserved balls (standby number) of the variable display (variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on (start prize) It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 They are incremented by one (see S424 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of special symbols is executed (see S228 in FIG. 93). The second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c2, the initial value is set to zero, each time a sphere enters the second entrance 640 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 They are incremented by one (see S430 in FIG. 94). On the other hand, the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c2 is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of special symbols is executed (see S223 in FIG. 93).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. First, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol variation process 8 (S121) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This special symbol variation process 8 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). In the same manner as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 22), the variation display on the first symbol display device 37, and the process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, etc. is there.

In the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, in each process of S201, S202, and S208 to S217, the special symbol variation process (figure) in the fifth embodiment (first embodiment), respectively. 22), the same processes as S201, S202, and S208 to S217 are performed. Further, in the special symbol fluctuation process 8 (see FIG. 93) in the seventh embodiment, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S202: No), the second special symbol holding ball number The value (N2) of the counter 203c2 is acquired (S221), and it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the acquired second special symbol holding counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (S222).

In the process of S222, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is greater than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S222: Yes), then the second special symbol is held Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N2) of the sphere number counter 203c2 (S223), and set the special figure 2 holding sphere number command indicating the value of the updated second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c2 (S224) .. The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S224, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a2 is shifted (S225). In the processing of S225, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the second special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a2 is shifted to the execution area side in order. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S222, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is not a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S222: No) , Next, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c1 is acquired (S226), and the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c1 is greater than 0 or not. It is determined (S227).

In the processing of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is not a value larger than 0 (value of 1 or more) (that is, 0) (S227: No), Since neither the reserved ball of the 1 special symbol nor the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol exists, it means that the variable display of the special symbol cannot be newly started, so this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S227, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is a value larger than 0 (a value of 1 or more) (S227: Yes), then the first special Update by subtracting 1 from the value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 (S228), and set the special figure 1 holding ball number command indicating the value of the updated first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 ( S229). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 and is executed by the MPU 201 in the main process (see FIG. 29), like the special figure 1 reserved ball number command. In the external output process (S901), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S229, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a1 is shifted by the same method as the process of S225 (S230), and the process is executed. The process moves to S208.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the details of the start winning process 8 (S122) in the seventh embodiment will be described. This start winning process 8 (S122) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) instead of the starting winning process (see FIG. 24) in the fifth embodiment (and the first embodiment). This is a process for executing corresponding control when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is detected.

In the start winning process 8 (S122), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S421). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, in the processing of S421, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c1 (corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol) The number of times N1 of the variable display to be held is acquired (S422). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c1 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, in the process of S421, when it is determined that the first ball entrance 64 has not been won (S421: No), or even when the game ball is won in the first ball entrance 64, the process of S423. In the case where it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S423: No), the process proceeds to S427. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S421: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203c1 is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is incremented by 1 (S424). Then, the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c1 changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure 1 reserved sphere number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and external output processing (S901) of main processing (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. In the middle, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203c1 is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command in the process of S425, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a1 of the RAM 203 (S426), and the processing is S427. Transition to. In the process of S426, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203c1 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize) (S427). In this process as well, similar to the process of S421, a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S427, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c2 (in the lottery of the second special symbol Acquiring the corresponding number of times of variable display holding N2) (S428), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) ( S429).

Then, whether there is no prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, 4) (S429: No), the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S427: Yes), and the value (N2) of the second special symbol holding ball counter 203c2 is less than 4 (S429: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 (S430). Then, the special figure 2 holding ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203c2 changed by the calculation is set (S431).

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, the value of the second special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c2 is extracted from the special figure 2 holding sphere number command, and the extracted value is the special symbol of the RAM 223. It is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command in the process of S431, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21) described above. Each value of the type counter C3 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a2 of the RAM 203 (S432), and the processing of S433 is performed. Transition. In the process of S432, similarly to the process of S426, the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c2 is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the process of S433, the pre-reading process for pre-reading the win/fail of the various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S433), and the present process is ended. Details of this prefetching process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the prefetch process (S433). In this prefetching process (S433), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball has been detected for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in the present start winning process 8 (see FIG. 94). If it is determined that a new incoming ball has not been detected (S1501) (S1501: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, if it is determined that a new incoming ball is detected (S1501: Yes), then the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected incoming ball is the upper limit value (ie, 4). Whether or not it is determined (S1502), and when it is determined that the value is the upper limit value (S1502: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S1502: No), various counter values acquired at the time of detecting a ball (start winning process 8 (FIG. 94)). Based on S426 of the reference) or various counter values stored in the process of S432), whether or not the lottery in the special symbol is a big hit (whether or not it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit), and its A fluctuation pattern is predicted (S1503).

By the process of S1503, if the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then the predicted lottery win or fail and the predicted stop type, The winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S1504), and this processing ends.

The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 29) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the winning/disapproval, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information as prize information in the prize information storage area 223a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, the period until the passing game ball enters one of the entrances (the area below the game board 13). (The period until reaching) is relatively long (requires 7 to 8 seconds), and the period until the game ball that has passed through enters one of the entrances is relatively short It is configured to provide two flow paths including a right second flow path (about 1 second). By firing the game ball aiming at the right first passage in the jackpot, the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a becomes long (that is, until the jackpot ends, as in the fifth embodiment described above). However, it is possible to enter the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a (prize) at a higher rate than in the case where the game ball is shot by aiming at the specific winning opening 65a by left-handing.

Further, when the game ball is shot toward the right second passage, there is almost no possibility of entering the specific winning opening 65a, but a relatively short period (1 second) to the second winning opening 640. It can be reached by Therefore, in the high probability state of the normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball inlet 640 is likely to be opened, continue to shoot the game ball toward the right second flow path (66% to 84% of By hitting right with the firing strength), the lottery of the second special symbol can be continuously performed without reducing the number of balls. On the other hand, if left-handedness is performed, the possibility of entering the second entrance 640 is almost zero, but it is possible to enter the first entrance 64 and the specific winning opening 65a. You can enter the ball. Further, the area below the game board 13 (the first entrance 64 or the specific winning opening 65) is shorter than the case where the game sphere is shot toward the right first passage (about 1 to 2 seconds). It is possible to reach the game ball to the area provided). Therefore, a player who wants to finish the jackpot in a short period of time (want to obtain a large number of prize balls in a short time) can be left-handed. In addition, even in the normal state of the normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be opened, it is possible to perform the game aiming at the game ball entering the first entrance 64 by left-handing. As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down can be changed according to the game state, the player's taste, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the enjoyment of distinguishing the shooting directions of the game balls, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path is configured to enter either the second entrance port 640 or the out port 66, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a part of the game ball that has flowed into the right second flow path may be configured to be able to reach the first ball entrance 64, the specific winning port 65, and the like. On the contrary, a part of the game ball that has flown into the right first flow path may be configured to be able to reach the second ball entrance 640.

In the seventh embodiment, it is easy to enter the specific winning opening 65a, it is difficult to enter the second winning opening 640, and the right first flow path is difficult to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Although the right second flow path that easily enters the ball 640 is provided on the right side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game ball flowing down the right second flow path can enter the first ball entrance 64, and the winning rate to the specific winning port 65a is lower than that when flowing down the right first flow path. You may comprise so that it may become. With such a configuration, when the game is normally performed by left-handed striking and the game is aimed at the right second flow path by right-handed striking, the game ball enters the first entrance 64. Since it is possible to enter the ball, it is possible to shoot the game ball in the shooting direction desired by the player during the normal game. In addition, for example, on the left side of the game board 13, it is easier to enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is more difficult to enter the first winning opening 64 than the left first flow path and the left first flow path. A configuration may be employed in which a left second flow channel that is less likely to enter the opening 65a and is easier to enter the first entry port 64 than the left first flow channel is provided.

In the seventh embodiment, during the game state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the production (see FIG. 91) is suggested to suggest that the normal game ball 67 be shot at the normal entrance 67. However, in addition to this, when the player is left-handed despite the fact that the time saving state of the normal symbol is set (for example, it is detected that the game ball has entered the first entrance 64) In the case of doing), it may be configured to execute an effect (warning effect) of a mode that strongly requests to shoot the game ball aiming at the normal entrance 67. Similarly, when it is detected that a right hit is made in the normal state of the normal symbol (for example, it is detected that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance 67), the left hit is made. It may be configured to execute an effect (warning effect) in a strongly requested mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from continuing to play the game while erroneously shooting the game ball and losing the game.

<First Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various modifications of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. First, with reference to FIG. 96, a first modification example of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is long. I was there. Further, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball is likely to enter the second ball inlet 640, while it is difficult to enter the specific winning port 65a.

On the other hand, in the first modified example, both the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path can reach the specific winning opening 65a. Also, as will be described later in detail, by continuously hitting right while the jackpot game is being executed, a game ball flowing down the right first flow path and a game ball flowing down the right second flow path It is configured to reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. As a result, during the execution of the jackpot game, two game balls are won (winning) for the specific winning opening 65a, so that in each round, the maximum number of winnings for the specific winning opening 65a is exceeded. It becomes easy to make a prize. More specifically, as described above, in each of the big jackpot rounds, when the tenth prize for the specific winning opening 65a is detected, it is determined that the condition for ending the round is satisfied, and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. .. Under this circumstance, when 9 gaming balls have already reached the specific winning opening 65a and two gaming balls reach the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time, the 10th winning is detected and then the specific winning prize is detected. By the time the mouth 65a is closed, the eleventh game ball that arrives almost at the same time as the tenth game ball can also be awarded to the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in one round, the prize balls for 11 winnings (the prize balls for winnings exceeding the specified number) can be obtained relatively easily. Therefore, since it is possible to obtain a prize ball beyond the original jackpot specification of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a front view of the game board 13 in the first modified example. As shown in FIG. 96, in the game board 13 of the first modification, the right first flow path (the flow path formed on the rightmost side of the game board 13) has the detour accessory according to the seventh embodiment. Instead of 700, a plurality of nails are provided. With this plurality of nails, the flow direction of the game ball can be switched a plurality of times. On the other hand, in the right second flow path (the flow path formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the right first flow path), the flow down of the game ball is blocked compared to the right first flow path. There are few structures (to decelerate). Therefore, in the case of flowing down the right second flow path than in the case of flowing down the right first flow path, the lower region (the first ball entrance 64 or the variable entrance 64) after the game ball is shot is launched. The period until reaching the winning device 65) is shortened. More specifically, the period from when the game ball is launched to when it reaches the variable winning device 65 is 0. It will be about 6 seconds shorter.

Further, above the right first flow path and the right second flow path, a distribution member 850 that distributes the game balls to either the right first flow path or the right second flow path is provided. The game ball launched by right hitting always reaches the distribution member 850, and is distributed to any flow path (either the right first flow path or the right second flow path) by the distribution member 850. To be As shown in FIG. 96, the distribution member 850 has two holding portions 850a and 850b capable of receiving the game balls that have flowed down and temporarily holding them. The distribution member 850 is basically in a state in which one of the holding portions 850a and 850b faces upward and is stationary, and the game ball shot by a right hit is received by the holding portion facing upward. FIG. 96 illustrates an example of a situation in which the game ball that has been launched by a right hit is received while the holding portion 850a is facing upward and is stationary.

When the game ball is received by one of the holding portions 850a and 850b, the gravity due to the weight of the game ball acts on the distribution member 850. As a result, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850a, the distribution member 850 rotates counterclockwise about the rotation shaft 850c as a rotation shaft, and the holding portion 850b faces upward. In this state, the holding portion 850a forms an inclination in the lower left direction, so that the game ball held by the holding portion 850a falls in the lower left direction in front view. That is, it flows down the right second flow path. On the other hand, when the game ball is received by the holding portion 850b, the distribution member 850 rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 850c, and the holding portion 850a faces upward. In this state, since the holding portion 850b forms an inclination in the downward right direction, the game ball held by the holding portion 850b falls in the lower right direction in front view. That is, it flows down the right first flow path. Therefore, the distribution member 850 is in a state in which different holding portions face upward each time the game balls are distributed to any of the flow paths. Therefore, each time the game ball reaches the distribution member 650, the game ball can be alternately allocated to the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As described above, the time taken to reach the variable winning device 65 is shortened by about 0.6 seconds when flowing down the right second flow path rather than flowing down the right first flow path. And, as described above, the interval between the game balls is configured to be 0.6 seconds at the shortest. Therefore, when the player continuously hits the right ball, the one game ball distributed to the right first flow path and the game ball that is shot next to the one game ball and distributed to the right second flow path , Arrives at the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time, and wins the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time. For this reason, in each jackpot round, nine game balls have already been won into the specific winning opening 65a (the specific winning opening 65a is closed when one more winning is detected) When the two game balls flowing down the road and the right second flow path reach the specific winning opening 65a almost at the same time, 11 game balls can be entered in one round. In other words, simply by continuing to hit the right side in succession, it is possible to easily enter the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a in excess of the maximum winning number of 10 in each round of jackpot (the winning number which is the condition for ending the round). It is possible to make a ball (so-called over-winning is generated). Therefore, the interest of the player in the jackpot game can be further improved.

In the first modified example, the game balls are alternately distributed to the right first flow path and the right second flow path by the distribution member 850 only by continuously hitting the game ball right. It is not limited to this. The distribution member 850 may be deleted, and the player may adjust the firing intensity to aim for over-winning. In this case, when the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65 in each round is 9 (the number of winnings is 1 less than the specified number), first of all, the game ball is aimed at the right first flow path, and continuously. By firing a game ball aiming at the right second flow path, the game ball flowing down the right first flow path and the game ball flowing down the right second flow path reach the variable winning device 65 almost at the same time. be able to. That is, the 11th game ball can be won in the specific winning opening 65a between the time when the winning of the 10th gaming ball is detected and the specific winning opening 65a is closed. Therefore, compared to the above-described first modified example, a technique for quickly switching the firing direction is required, but for the player who accurately switches the firing direction, the over-winning can be generated more reliably. That is, in the first modified example described above, an over-winning is not generated unless the tenth game ball is distributed to the right first flow path in one round. That is, depending on the state of the distribution member 850 at the start of the round, whether or not the overwinning state is easy is different. On the other hand, when the distribution member 850 is deleted, if the player has the technique of switching the firing direction, the tenth and eleventh game balls must be the right first flow path and the right second flow path. Since it can be made to flow down to the flow path, it is possible to more reliably generate an over-winning.

<Second Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a second modification example of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a is highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is long. I was there. Further, when the game ball flows down the right second flow path, the game ball is likely to enter the second ball inlet 640, while it is difficult to enter the specific winning port 65a.

On the other hand, in the second modified example, a variable winning device 6500 is used instead of the variable winning device 65 in the seventh embodiment as a variable winning device to which a prize ball is awarded by entering a game ball during a big hit. Is provided at a position where the game ball shot by left-handing cannot enter. This variable winning device 6500 is configured such that a game ball flowing down the right first flow path and a game ball flowing down the right second flow path can enter. Further, the right first flow path is configured such that the period until it reaches the variable winning device 6500 is longer than that of the right second flow path, and while the variable winning device 6500 is opened. The ratio of entering the specific winning opening 6500a is increased. As a result, in the jackpot, different playability can be realized depending on whether the game ball is fired at the right first flow path or when the game ball is fired at the right second flow path. That is, by continuing to shoot the game sphere aiming at the right first flow path, the execution period of the big hit game becomes longer, but while the game performance is less likely to cause a waste ball, aiming at the right second flow path. By continuing to shoot the game ball, the execution period of the jackpot game is shortened, but it becomes a game property that a waste ball can occur.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 97, in the second modified example, the variable winning a prize device 65 is deleted from the game board 13 (see FIG. 90) in the seventh embodiment, below the right second flow path. However, the only difference is that they are connected to the lower area of the game board 13 and that a variable winning device 6500 is provided between the right first flow path and the right second flow path.

As shown in FIG. 97, the variable winning device 6500 is awarded a prize ball each time it detects a ball entering a specific winning opening 6500a into which a game ball can enter. The variable winning device 6500 is provided with a pair of electric auditors' products 6500a1 and 6500a2 that can prevent the game balls from entering. These electric auditors products 6500a1 and 6500a2 are normally closed so that it is impossible to enter the specific winning opening 6500a, and in each round of the jackpot, a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapses, or a game ball). Will be opened until 10 balls are entered.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 97, the lower end of one guide passage (guide passage 780) inside the bypass article 700 by opening the electric accessory 6500a1 provided on the right first passage side. And the tip of the electric accessory 6500a1 come close to each other. That is, as a result that the game ball cannot pass between the guide passage 780 and the electric accessory 6500a1, the game ball flowing down the guide passage 780 almost certainly wins the specific winning opening 6500a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 6500a2 provided on the right second flow path side is opened, a gap of one game ball or more is left on the left side of the tip (upper end) of the electric accessory 6500a. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the right second flow path is guided by the opened electric role object 6500a2 and easily enters the specific winning opening 6500a, but more than the tip (upper end) of the electric role object 6500a2. There is also a possibility of passing through the left side and flowing down to a region below the game board 13 (a region where the first inlet 64 and the outlet 66 are provided).

As described above, in the second modified example of the seventh embodiment, when the game ball is launched toward the right second flow path, the game ball can be inserted into the specific winning opening 6500a. When the game ball continues to be fired toward the right first passage during the jackpot, the game ball takes a long time to reach the variable winning device 6500 (the jackpot game execution period is long), Almost all the game balls that have arrived while the specific winning opening 6500a is open are provided in the specific winning opening 6500a. On the other hand, if the game ball continues to be shot toward the right second passage during the big hit, the period until the game ball reaches the variable winning device 6500 is short (the big hit game can be finished in a short period of time). However, there is a risk that a part of the game balls (for example, 1 out of 10 balls) will enter the outlet 66 without entering the specific winning opening 6500a. .. Therefore, similarly to the above-described fifth embodiment, it is possible to reduce the number of useless balls (game balls that enter the outlet 66 without entering the specific winning opening 6500a) instead of increasing the jackpot period. It is possible to allow the player to select the playability that can be achieved and the playability that the number of wasted balls becomes relatively large instead of being able to speedily win the jackpot.

<Third Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a third modification example of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the above-described seventh embodiment, the bypass accessory 700 provided in the right first flow path extends the period of passing through the right first flow path. As a result, when the game ball flows down the right first flow path, the winning rate for the specific winning opening 65a becomes the highest, while the period until reaching the specific winning opening 65a is extended.

On the other hand, in the third modified example, the detour agent 700 is deleted in the right first channel, and the width of the channel is less than two game balls (that is, the detour agent 700 is provided. The width of the flow channel is narrower than that of the conventional case). Then, as a configuration for prolonging the period in which the game ball flows down the right first flow path, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are arranged in the right first flow path. By narrowing the width of the right first flow path, it is possible to reduce the ratio of the area of the right first flow path to the area of the board surface of the game board 13, so that the degree of freedom in arranging nails, windmills, etc. on the board surface. Can be increased.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 13 in the third modified example. As shown in FIG. 98, in the game board 13 according to the third modified example, a detour accessory 700 is provided in the right first flow path with respect to the board surface configuration (see FIG. 90) of the game board 13 according to the seventh embodiment. Instead, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided, and the difference is that the width of the right first flow path is narrow and the width of the right second flow path is wide.

The rotating bodies 861 to 863 described above will be described in more detail. As shown in FIG. 98, three rotating bodies 861 to 863 are provided in the right first flow path. The operation of the three rotating bodies 861 to 863 will be described by taking the rotating body 861 as an example. As shown in FIG. 98, the rotating body 861 has a substantially crescent shape in which a part of a circle is hollowed out, and can rotate counterclockwise in a front view with the rotating shaft 861b as a rotating shaft. It is configured to be possible. Further, the rotating body 861 is provided with a ball stopping portion 861a capable of receiving only one flowing down game ball. In the state where the ball stopping portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball reaching the rotating body 861 is received by the ball stopping portion 861a. Since the ball stopper 861a rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating body 861, the game ball received by the ball stopper 861a also rotates about the rotation axis 861b. Then, when the ball stopper 861a faces the downstream side of the right first flow path, it falls to the downstream side of the right first flow path due to gravity acting on the game ball.

On the other hand, when the game ball reaches the rotating body 861 with the ball stopping portion 861a not facing the upstream direction in the right first flow path, it contacts the upstream side of the outer peripheral portion of the rotating body 861. It becomes a state. The state in which the game balls are in contact with this outer peripheral portion is continued until the ball stopper 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path due to the rotating body 861 rotating. When the ball stopping portion 861a faces the upstream direction of the right first flow path, the game ball flows down to the ball stopping portion 861a, and thereafter, as described above, the rotating shaft is interlocked with the rotating operation of the rotating body 861. After performing the rotation operation with the 861b as the rotation axis, the fluid drops to the downstream side in the right first flow path.

In this way, by providing the rotating bodies 861 to 863 for the right first flow path, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down each time the rotating bodies are reached. The game ball that has reached each rotating body is temporarily stopped, the ball stopping portion receives the game ball, and a plurality of motions are performed that cause the rotating motion around the rotation axis to be performed in conjunction with the rotating motion of the rotating body. Can be done. Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotating bodies 861 to 863 are not provided, it is possible to prolong the period required for the game ball reaching the right first flow path to completely flow down the right first flow path. Therefore, it is possible to prolong the period until the game ball shot toward the right first flow path reaches the lower region of the game board 13 as compared with the game ball shot by the left hit.

As described above, in the third modification example of the seventh embodiment, instead of the bypass member 700, a plurality of rotating bodies 861 to 863, which have a relatively small installation area, are arranged in the right first flow path. There is. Then, by decreasing the flow-down speed of the game ball by each of the rotating bodies 861 to 863 (blocking the flow-down), the game ball launched toward the right first flow path reaches the lower region of the game board 13. The period between is configured to be longer than the period until the game ball shot by left hitting reaches the lower region. As a result, the area occupied by the right first flow path can be reduced while realizing the same game playability as in the above-described seventh embodiment, so that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration can be further improved.

In addition, in the third modification of the seventh embodiment, three rotary bodies are provided in the right first flow path, but the number and arrangement of the rotary bodies are the same as those of the third modification. It is not limited and can be set arbitrarily.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and it is easily inferred that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It is possible.

In the fifth to seventh embodiments and the modifications thereof, the flow path having the bypass accessory 700 is arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80, but the board surface configuration is arbitrarily changed. can do. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be arranged on the left side of the variable display device unit 890.

In each of the fifth to seventh embodiments and the modifications thereof, each of the guide channels 740 to 790 of the bypass material 700 is configured to project to the front side with respect to the base plate 60 of the game board 13. It is not limited to this. For example, the detour accessory 700 may be provided on the back side of the base plate 60. That is, by arranging the detour compound 700 on the back side of the base plate 60 and configuring the front side of the detour compound 700 of the base plate 60 with at least a transparent material, the flow down state of the game ball can be visually confirmed. To do. Then, of the base plate 60, the upstream side of the bypass material 700 (the position where the game ball that has advanced to the inner side of the base plate 60 can flow into the opening 710) and the downstream side (flow out of the opening 720). At a position where the game sphere can flow out to the front side of the base plate 60), an opening having a size that penetrates the base plate 60 and allows the game sphere to pass therethrough may be provided. With such a configuration, nails, windmills, etc. can be arranged on the front side of the bypass member 700 in the base plate 60. That is, the board surface of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the possibility of executing the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the success/failure and the look-ahead result (change type) of the change pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to these, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the jackpot type. With such a configuration, it is possible to predict the jackpot type in the case of a big hit from the presence or absence of execution of the continuous announcement effect and the effect type of the announcement effect, so that the player's interest in the continuous announcement effect can be improved. You can

In each of the above-described embodiments, the continuous announcement effect is more likely to be executed as the result of the lottery becomes higher. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the continuous announcement effect may be executed more easily as the result of the lottery has a lower expectation. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a game is played in the expectation that the continuous announcement effect is not executed. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the execution of the continuous announcement effect is determined, the variable display accompanied by the announcement effect is continuously executed over the plurality of variable displays. It is not necessary to execute the notice production over the variable display. For example, at the start of each variable display for which the continuous notice effect is set, a configuration may be adopted in which whether or not the notice effect is set is drawn by lot. Further, in this case, the higher the degree of expectation of the winning information that triggered the setting of the continuous notice effect, the higher the probability of the lottery setting the notice effect in each variable display. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the big hit as the notice effects continue, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data (first embodiment) is not used to determine one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a one by one. Form), points (second embodiment), the value of the high-expectancy level flag 223n (third embodiment), and the like, and based on data indicating the content of the lottery results that are being held, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that one or a plurality of data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is discriminated one by one. Further, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, only when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the logical sum data (first embodiment), the points (second embodiment), the value of the high-expectation level flag 223n (third embodiment). Although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect based on the data indicating the content of the held lottery result such as the form), it is not limited to this. Even in part or all of the determination of approval/disapproval, the determination may be performed based on the data indicating the content of the held lottery result. On the contrary, in a state other than the notice lottery prohibited state (normal state), it is always determined whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed based on only the lottery result notified by the prize information command (random number range command). May be

In each of the above embodiments, the advance notice lottery prohibition state is set when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is decided, but the advance notice lottery prohibition state setting timing is not limited to this, and is arbitrarily set. May be set. Specifically, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibited state may be set only when the execution of the continuous advance notice effect which is a big hit is finally decided. That is, the continuous announcement effect may be overwritten during the execution of the continuous announcement effect that is out. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the continuous announcement effect, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Further, for example, the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set based on the start of the jackpot, or the advance notice lottery prohibition state may be set based on the probability change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the ordinary symbol being started. Good. Further, for example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state by lottery every time the variation start timing is reached. For example, an operation means operable by the player is provided and It may be configured to switch between setting and cancellation of the advance notice lottery prohibited state according to the operation content. Similarly, the timing at which the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released is not limited to the timing at which one normal variable display ends after the end of the continuous advance notice effect, and may be arbitrarily set. For example, the advance notice lottery prohibited state may not be released until the continuous notice production is finished and the variable display is finished five times, or conversely, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is released at the time when the continuous notice production is finished. You may. Alternatively, it may be canceled at a predetermined timing during execution of the continuous notice effect, or may be canceled regardless of the continuous notice effect. For example, it may be configured to be released based on the end of a jackpot, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc. It may be configured to determine. Further, it may be configured to be releasable based on the operation of the player. Further, the advance notice lottery prohibited state may not be provided.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the start winning command (random number range command) output from the main control device 110. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not a thing. For example, the main controller 110 may determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed, and notify the voice lamp controller 113 of the determination result. In this case, the information indicating whether or not the continuous announcement effect is the set variation pattern may be included in the variation pattern command and transmitted, or may be transmitted by another command. Further, only the execution of the continuous announcement effect may be determined to be output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the duration of the continuous announcement effect may be grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 side. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the advance notice lottery prohibited state is set only after the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined and after the end of the continuous advance notice effect until one variable display ends. , But not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the advance notice lottery prohibition state even when a big hit occurs. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the notice lottery prohibition state is released, and data (logical sum data (first embodiment), point (second) of the lottery result (variation type) of each of the reserved balls held at that time is released. (Embodiment) or the value of the high expectation type flag 223n (third embodiment)) may be used to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect. Here, during the big hit, since the player shoots a ball aiming at the specific winning opening 65a, the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) provided vertically above the specific winning opening 65a is also a big hit. There is a high possibility that multiple balls will enter. That is, there is a high possibility that a plurality of holding balls will increase during the period from the start of the jackpot to the end thereof. Under this circumstance, if it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed each time the starting winning for the first entrance 64 that occurs during the big hit is determined, the starting winning corresponding to the variation type having a low expectation degree first. After the continuous announcement effect is determined based on the above, and the announcement lottery prohibited state is set, there is a possibility that a start winning corresponding to a variation type having a high degree of expectation will occur. In other words, it is possible to determine whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be executed based on the variation display based on the variation type with high expectation, even though the holding ball corresponding to the variation type with high expectation exists in the hold. There is a risk of disappearing. On the other hand, advance notice lottery prohibition state is set during jackpot, the notice lottery prohibition state is released at the end of jackpot, and continuous notice production is performed based on the lottery result of each pending ball held at that time With the configuration for determining whether or not to execute, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect based on the holding ball of the fluctuation type with the highest expectation among the holding balls held at the end of the jackpot. it can. Therefore, the continuous announcement effect can be set more appropriately.

In each of the above embodiments, when the notice lottery prohibition state is canceled, the example of executing the determination of whether or not to execute the continuous notice effect according to the variation types of the plurality of holding balls has been described. The judgment is not limited to. For example, the technology of each of the above-described embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine configured to be able to change the mode of a holding symbol to a mode different from the usual mode (so-called gaming machine equipped with a so-called pending notice effect). .. That is, the prohibition state in which changing the mode of the hold symbol is prohibited is set based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, when the execution of the hold announcement effect is determined or when the jackpot is started), When the prohibited state is canceled, the fluctuation type of a plurality of holding balls that are held at the time of the cancellation is determined, and whether or not the holding notice can be executed with the lottery probability according to the fluctuation type with the highest expectation, and It may be configured to determine the mode of the hold symbol when executing the hold notice. Further, the technique of each of the above-described embodiments is not limited to the case of determining the variation type of the holding ball in order to execute the continuous announcement effect, the pending announcement effect, or the like. The technique of each of the above-described embodiments can be applied when performing some kind of determination on a plurality of holding balls.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the advance notice lottery prohibition state is released, the determination as to whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed is executed according to the variation types of the plurality of reserved balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, each time a start winning is detected without setting the advance notice lottery prohibited state, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect can be executed according to the variation type of each holding ball held at that time (the continuous advance notice effect is being executed. In that case, it may be configured to execute the determination of whether or not the continuous announcement effect can be extended. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to change the control depending on whether the advance notice lottery is prohibited or not, so that the description content of the control program can be simplified. Therefore, the development load on the developer can be reduced.

All or a part of each of the above-described embodiments may be combined. More specifically, for example, the main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the range of values to which the various counter values (random number values) in the second embodiment belong, and the voice lamp control unit 113 side A series of controls for performing prefetch processing based on the range of values to which various counter values (random number values) belong may be applied to the first embodiment and the third embodiment.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (When the read-ahead prohibition state is released, all hold is read ahead)
In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for executing main control relating to a game and a sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is a discriminating condition. A determination means for performing determination based on establishment, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination means. First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result to the slave control means, and determination information acquisition means for obtaining the determination information used for the determination by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, A second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; The signal receiving means is configured to be capable of receiving at least the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the result signal, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, and the determination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. On the basis of this, information storage that can store at least the information according to the received discrimination information signal, up to a predetermined number of information, until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. Means, a specific determination means capable of performing a specific determination based on the information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage means, and a determination by the specific determination means. And a second effect executing means for executing the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination based on the second determination result. A gaming machine A1 characterized by comprising.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays the symbols in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that the jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Moreover, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainments are executed to improve the entertainment of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such a conventional game machine, by performing an effect of the same system over a plurality of execution periods of variable display (that is, executing a so-called continuous notice effect), a plurality of consecutive display operations can be performed continuously. There is also a thing that can keep the player feeling a sense of expectation over the displayed variable display.

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a case where, while one continuous notice effect is being executed, the continuous notice effect is again determined to be executed, and the consecutive notice effect is repeatedly executed. In this case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variation display in the continuous notice presentation should be expected.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, in the main control means, the bonus game execution means notifies the player based on the first determination result obtained by the determination by the determination means executed based on the establishment of the determination condition. An advantageous privilege game is executed. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition, the determination information used for the determination by the determination unit is acquired by the determination information acquisition unit, and the determination information signal based on the acquired determination information is the first before the determination condition is satisfied. It is output to the sub control means by the two output means. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the determination result signal received by the signal receiving means, the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal is executed by the first effect executing means. On the basis of the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, at least the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means by the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal with the predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Information is stored by the information storage means. Upon the establishment of the specific condition, the specific determination unit executes the specific determination based on the information according to the plurality of determination information signals stored in the information storage unit, and the specific determination unit determines the second determination result. Based on that, the second effect execution means executes the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects executed after the determination.

Thereby, since the second effect can be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects, the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, when receiving the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, when receiving to discriminate whether or not to execute the second effect based on the information according to the received discrimination information signal A gaming machine A2, which is provided with a discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, triggered by the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the second effect is produced based on the information according to the received discrimination information signal. Since it is determined by the reception time determination means whether to execute, the opportunity to execute the second effect can be increased, and thus the effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine A2, the second effect executing means, when the receiving time determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed, the first effect corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination. A gaming machine A3, wherein the second effect is executed over a plurality of execution periods of the first effect including at least.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, when it is determined by the receiving time determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the first effect corresponding to the determination information signal that triggered the determination is provided. Since the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means over the execution period of at least the plurality of first effects, the effect can be diversified.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the determination limit state in which the determination by the reception determination unit is limited is set based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and the determination limit state is set by the restriction state setting unit. And a canceling unit that cancels the determination limit state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined cancellation condition, the specific condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined cancellation condition. A gaming machine A4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination limit state in which the determination by the reception determination means is limited is set by the limitation state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. When the determination limit state is set by the limit state setting unit, the determination limit state is released by the release unit based on the satisfaction of a predetermined release condition. The specific condition is satisfied when the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied.

As a result, when the discrimination restriction state is released, the discrimination by the specific discrimination means can be executed based on the information according to the plurality of discrimination result signals already stored in the information storage means, so that the second effect There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the above based on more information corresponding to the determination result signals.

In the gaming machine A4, the restriction state setting means sets the discrimination restriction state based on the fact that the reception time discrimination means discriminates to execute the second effect. ..

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine A4, the discrimination state is set by the limitation state setting means based on the fact that the reception time discrimination means determines that the second effect is to be executed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the execution determination of the second effect from being redundantly determined by the reception determination means during the execution of the second effect.

In the gaming machine A5, the predetermined release condition is satisfied based on that at least one of the first effects has been executed after the second effect has ended, and the gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, a predetermined release condition is satisfied based on the fact that at least one first effect has been executed after the second effect has ended, so the second effect When at least one first effect is being executed during the execution of, and after the second effect is completed, it is possible to restrict the determination of whether to execute the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute the first effect without the second effect at least once after the second effect is finished and before the second effect is started. The player can easily understand whether or not the first effect has been continued. Therefore, there is an effect that a more easily understandable effect can be realized.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the specific determination means includes the information corresponding to the first determination result in the information according to the determination information signal stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the ratio of the second determination result is higher than that of the case where the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the information corresponding to the first determination result is included in the information corresponding to the determination information signal stored in the information storage means. Since the determination by the specific determination means is performed so that the ratio of the second determination result is higher in the case where it is included than in the case where the information corresponding to the first determination result is not included, When the second effect is executed, there is an effect that the player can be made to play the game in the expectation that the bonus game will be executed.

<Characteristic B group> (Determine the type of change being held from the logical sum data of each holding area)
In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for executing main control relating to a game and a sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is a discriminating condition. A determination means for performing determination based on establishment, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination means. First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result to the slave control means, and determination information acquisition means for obtaining the determination information used for the determination by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, A second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; The signal receiving means is configured to be capable of receiving at least the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the result signal, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal, and the determination information signal is received by the signal receiving means. On the basis of this, information storage that can store at least the information according to the received discrimination information signal, up to a predetermined number of information, until the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means. And a calculation data calculation unit that calculates predetermined calculation data by performing a predetermined calculation on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage unit when the specific condition is satisfied. And a second effect execution determining unit that determines whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined operation data calculated by the operation data calculating unit, and the second effect execution determination unit determines the second effect execution determining unit. A second effect executing means for executing the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination based on the determination that the effect is to be executed. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays the symbols in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that the jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Moreover, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainments are executed to improve the entertainment of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such a conventional game machine, by performing an effect of the same system over a plurality of execution periods of variable display (that is, executing a so-called continuous notice effect), a plurality of consecutive display operations can be performed continuously. There is also a thing that can keep the player feeling a sense of expectation over the displayed variable display.

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a case where, while one continuous notice effect is being executed, the continuous notice effect is again determined to be executed, and the consecutive notice effect is repeatedly executed. In this case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variation display in the continuous notice presentation should be expected. Further, in order to solve this, when one continuous notice effect is determined, a method of limiting the determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed until the end of the consecutive notice effect can be considered. In this case, since it is not possible to execute the continuous announcement effect for the holding ball based on the start winning detected during the execution of the continuous announcement effect, the next continuous announcement effect is executed after one continuous announcement effect is finished. There was a case where a relatively long period was vacated before being told. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of all the reserved balls held during the continuous announcement effect, it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect after the end of the continuous announcement effect, Since it is necessary to determine the lottery result of the reserved balls, there is a problem that the processing load is increased as compared with the normal determination of whether or not the continuous notice effect can be executed.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, in the main control means, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player, based on the result of the first judgment by the judgment means. .. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. The discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is satisfied by the second output means. Before that, it is output to the slave control means. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the determination result signal being received by the signal receiving means, the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal is executed by the first effect executing means. On the basis of the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, at least the corresponding discrimination result signal is received by the signal receiving means by the information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal with the predetermined number of information as an upper limit. Information is stored by the information storage means. When the specific condition is satisfied, the arithmetic data calculating means performs a predetermined arithmetic operation on the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means to calculate predetermined arithmetic data. Based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculating means, the second effect execution determining means determines whether to execute the second effect. Based on the fact that the second effect execution determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect executing means causes the second effect executing means to perform one or a plurality of first effect execution periods executed after the determination. The second effect is executed.

Accordingly, it is possible to determine whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data obtained as a result of performing the predetermined calculation on the information corresponding to the plurality of determination information signals. The processing load of the sub-control means is reduced as compared with the case where all the information stored in “1. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine B1, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, a predetermined identification is made in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals which are the objects of the predetermined calculation. Information discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the information corresponding to the discriminating information is included, wherein the second effect execution discriminating means includes the information corresponding to the specific discriminating information by the information discriminating means. A game machine B2 characterized in that, when judged, it is judged whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the predetermined calculation data calculated by the calculation data calculation means, the information corresponding to the predetermined specific discrimination information in the information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals which are the target of the predetermined calculation. Whether or not is included is determined by the information determining means. When it is determined by the information determining means that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, the second effect execution determining means determines whether to execute the second effect based on the predetermined calculation data.

With this, the opportunity to perform the determination by the second effect execution determination unit can be limited to the case where the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included, and thus the frequency of the determination process can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control unit can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2, the predetermined specific discrimination information types include first discrimination information corresponding to the first discrimination result and second discrimination information different from the first discrimination result. At least the determination information is provided, and the second effect execution determination means determines that the first determination information is more than the first determination information is determined by the information determination means to include the second determination information. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it is determined that the second effect is executed at a higher rate when it is determined to be included.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the first determination information corresponding to the first determination result and the second determination information corresponding to the determination result different from the first determination result are provided as the predetermined specific determination information type. ing. The second effect execution determining unit determines that the second effect execution determining unit has a higher ratio when the information determining unit determines that the first determining information is included than the second determining information is included. It is determined that the performance is executed.

As a result, when the second effect is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the privilege game will be executed with the first determination result.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the main control means specifies the determination result by the determination means before the determination condition is satisfied, based on the determination information being acquired by the determination information acquisition means. The information storage unit includes a pre-identification unit and a discrimination information signal generation unit that generates the discrimination information signal by including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result identified by the pre-identification unit. The storage area configured by a plurality of bits corresponding to each of the plurality of determination results that can be identified by the identifying means is configured to have at least the predetermined number of information, and the slave control means is configured by the signal receiving means. A bit setting for setting a bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to a specific state in one storage area provided in the information storage means based on the reception of the discrimination information signal. The arithmetic data calculating means calculates a logical sum of information corresponding to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means as the predetermined arithmetic data, as the predetermined arithmetic operation. The information discriminating means is for discriminating that the information corresponding to the specific discriminating information is included when the specific bit of the logical sum is in the specific state. Amusement machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified by the pre-identification means before the discrimination condition is satisfied, based on the fact that the discrimination information is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means. A discrimination information signal including at least information corresponding to the discrimination result identified by the pre-identification means is generated by the discrimination information signal generation means. A storage area formed of a plurality of bits corresponding to each of the plurality of discrimination results that can be identified by the pre-identification means is provided in the information storage means by at least a predetermined number of pieces of information. In the slave control means, based on the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal in one storage area provided in the information storage means is set. It is set to a specific state by means. As the predetermined calculation, the logical sum of information according to the plurality of discrimination information signals stored in the information storage means is calculated as the predetermined calculation data by the calculation data calculation means. When the specific bit of the logical sum is in a specific state, it is determined by the information determining means that the information corresponding to the specific determination information is included.

This makes it possible to obtain the same result as that obtained by determining all the information used in the operation of the logical sum by simply determining the state of a specific bit of the logical sum, thus reducing the processing load of the slave control means. There is an effect that it can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B4, the bit setting means sets the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal to the on state and the other bits to the off state. ..

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4, the bit corresponding to the discrimination result indicated by the discrimination information signal is set to the ON state by the bit setting means, while the other bits are set to the OFF state. Therefore, there is an effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination means can be accurately performed.

In the gaming machine B4 or B5, as the type of the specific determination information, a plurality of types having different priorities to be determined by the second effect execution determination unit are set, and the information determination unit is set. Among the bits in the specific state, the bit corresponding to the determination result with the highest priority is determined, and the second effect execution determination means is the bit determined by the determination means. A gaming machine B6 for determining whether or not to execute the second effect at a determination rate corresponding to.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the following effect is produced. That is, a plurality of types having different priorities which are targets of the determination by the second effect execution determination means are set as the types of the specific determination result. Among the bits in a specific state, the bit corresponding to the determination result having the highest priority is discriminated by the information discriminating means. The second effect execution determining unit determines whether to execute the second effect at a determination rate corresponding to the bit determined by the determining unit.

This makes it possible to change the rate at which the second effect is determined to be executed according to the result of the determination performed by the determination means specified by the pre-specification means. This has the effect of allowing the player to guess from the presence or absence.

In the gaming machine B6, when discriminating the specific bit, the information discriminating means discriminates from the bit corresponding to the discrimination result having the highest priority to the specific state in descending order of the priority. The sub-control means is provided with a discriminant aborting means for aborting the discrimination by the information discriminating means based on the information discriminating means discriminating that it is in the specific state. A gaming machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the specific bit is discriminated by the information discriminating means, it is discriminated whether the bit corresponding to the discrimination result having the highest priority is in the specific state in the order of the highest priority. In the sub-control means, the discrimination by the information discriminating means terminates the discrimination by the information discriminating means based on the discrimination by the information discriminating means being in the specific state.

As a result, the determination process can be terminated without determining all the bits that make up a specific bit, and thus the processing load on the slave control unit can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Specific information indicating the pending content is updated by the sub, and whether or not continuous notice can be executed is determined based on the specific information)
In a gaming machine provided with a main control means for executing main control relating to a game and a sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is a discriminating condition. A determination means for performing determination based on establishment, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the determination means, and the determination means. First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result to the slave control means, and determination information acquisition means for obtaining the determination information used for the determination by the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, A second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied; The signal receiving means is configured to be capable of receiving at least the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means, and the discrimination by the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the result signal, the first effect execution means for executing the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the determination result signal, the specific information storage means for storing the specific information, and the signal receiving means. Based on the reception of the discrimination information signal, a discrimination result specifying unit that specifies the discrimination result by the discrimination unit corresponding to the received discrimination information signal, and based on the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying unit Information updating means capable of updating the specific information, and second effect execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, and the second Based on the determination by the effect execution determining means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect is executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination. And a second effect executing means for performing the game machine C1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays the symbols in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that the jackpot game advantageous to the player is given. Moreover, various images such as characters and landscapes are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainments are executed to improve the entertainment of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).

In addition, in such a conventional game machine, by performing an effect of the same system over a plurality of execution periods of variable display (that is, executing a so-called continuous notice effect), a plurality of consecutive display operations can be performed continuously. There is also a thing that can keep the player feeling a sense of expectation over the displayed variable display.

However, in such a conventional game machine, there is a case where, while one continuous notice effect is being executed, the continuous notice effect is again determined to be executed, and the consecutive notice effect is repeatedly executed. In this case, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to understand which variation display in the continuous notice presentation should be expected.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine C1, the main game control unit executes the special game advantageous to the player by the special game execution unit based on the result of the first judgment by the judgment unit. .. A discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means is output to the slave control means by the first output means. The discrimination information used for the discrimination by the discrimination means is acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the satisfaction of the predetermined acquisition condition, and the discrimination information signal based on the acquired discrimination information is satisfied by the second output means. Before that, it is output to the slave control means. Further, in the slave control means, the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means are received by the signal receiving means. Based on the determination result signal received by the signal receiving means, the first effect according to the determination result indicated by the determination result signal is executed by the first effect executing means. Based on the discrimination information signal received by the signal receiving means, the discrimination result by the discrimination means corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is specified by the discrimination result specifying means, and the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means Based on the above, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is updated by the information updating means. Based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the second effect execution determination means determines whether to execute the second effect, and the second effect execution determination means determines to execute the second effect. Based on the above, the second effect is executed by the second effect executing means for the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects executed after the determination.

Thereby, since the second effect can be executed over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects, the effects can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, when the determination result is specified by the determination result specifying unit, the reception determining unit determines whether to execute the second effect based on the specified determination result, and the reception determining unit. A game machine C2, comprising: a switching unit that switches whether to perform the second effect, the second effect execution determining unit or the reception determining unit.

According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1. That is, triggered by the determination result specifying unit specifying the determination result, the reception determining unit determines whether or not the second effect is to be executed based on the specified determination result. The switching unit switches whether the second effect execution unit or the reception determination unit determines whether to execute the second effect.

This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in determining whether to execute the second effect.

In the gaming machine C2, based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, a restriction state setting means for setting a judgment restriction state in which the discrimination by the reception judgment means is restricted, and the discrimination restriction state is set by the restriction state setting means. In the case where the predetermined release condition is satisfied, the release means releases the determination restriction state based on the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition, and the switching means is configured to perform the second effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined release condition. The game machine C3 is characterized in that the determination as to whether or not to execute is switched so as to be performed by the second effect execution determination means.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, in the case where the determination limit state in which the determination by the reception determination unit is limited is set by the limitation state setting unit based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, and the determination limit state is set by the limitation state setting unit, The determination limit state is released by the release means based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined cancellation condition, the switching means switches the second performance execution determination means to determine whether to execute the second performance.

With this, when the judgment restricted state is released, it is possible to judge whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution judging means based on the specific information updated during the judgment restricted state. The determination result corresponding to the determination information signal received during the determination-restricted state can be added to the effect that the determination by the second effect execution determination unit can be performed.

In the gaming machine C3, the switching unit determines whether to execute the second effect based on the determination whether to execute the second effect by the second effect execution determining unit. A gaming machine C4 characterized by being switched so as to be carried out by a discrimination means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, it is determined whether the second effect is to be executed based on the determination whether the second effect is to be executed by the second effect execution determining means. Since the switching is performed by the switching determining unit as is performed by the reception determining unit, it is possible to appropriately determine whether to execute the second effect.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the specific information is updated by the information updating means from the cancellation of the discrimination restricted state by the releasing means until the next discrimination restricted state is set by the restriction state setting means. A game machine C5, characterized by comprising update avoiding means for avoiding being played.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, information is updated from when the discrimination limiting state is released by the releasing means until the discrimination limiting state is set next by the limiting state setting means. Since the update avoiding means prevents the specific information from being updated by the means, it is possible to prevent the specific information from being unnecessarily updated in a period in which the determination using the specific information by the second effect executing means is difficult to be executed. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the slave control unit can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the sub-control means stores the regulation information storing the regulation information in which numerical data is associated with each determination result that can be identified by the determination result identifying means. And the information updating means performs a predetermined operation using the numerical data defined in the regulation information in association with the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identifying means, thereby the identification information A gaming machine C6 characterized in that

The gaming machine C6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, in the secondary control means, the regulation information storing means stores the regulation information in which the numerical data is associated with each discrimination result that can be identified by the discrimination result identifying means. Using the numerical data defined in association with the discrimination result identified by the discrimination result identifying means, the information updating means performs a predetermined operation to update the specific information.

As a result, the specific information can be updated by a simple process of reading out numerical data defined for each determination result and performing a predetermined calculation, so that the processing load when updating the specific information can be reduced. There is.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the specific information storage means stores, as the specific information, information indicating one determination result identified by the determination result identification means, and the sub control means , The priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly identified by the discrimination result identifying means is based on the priority determined in advance for each of the discrimination results that can be identified by the discrimination result identifying means. The information updating means includes a priority determining means for determining whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the information storing means, When it is determined that the priority corresponding to the determination result specified in step 1 is higher, the specific information is updated to information indicating the newly specified determination result. A gaming machine C7.

The gaming machine C7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5. That is, as the specific information, the information indicating one determination result specified by the determination result specifying unit is stored in the specific information storage unit. In the slave control means, the priority corresponding to the discrimination result newly identified by the discrimination result identifying means is determined based on the priority determined in advance for each discrimination result that can be identified by the discrimination result identifying means. The priority determining means determines whether the priority is higher than the priority corresponding to the determination result indicated by the specific information already stored in the means. When it is determined that the priority corresponding to the newly determined determination result by the priority determination means is higher, the information updating means updates the specific information to information indicating the newly determined determination result. It

As a result, even when the discrimination information signal is output a plurality of times, the specific information storage means discriminates the highest priority 1 among the plurality of discrimination results notified by the discrimination information signals a plurality of times. Since only the information indicating the result can be stored, there is an effect that whether to execute the second effect can be executed based on the determination information having the highest priority.

In the gaming machine C7, the sub-control unit executes the determination by the determination unit that is the newly identified determination result based on the update of the specific information by the information update unit. Number-of-times specifying means for specifying the number of times of the first effect executed in between, and number-of-effects information storing means for storing effect number information corresponding to the number of times of the first effect specified by the number-of-times specifying means. And the second effect executing means executes the second effect over the execution period of the first effect of the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means. A gaming machine C8 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7. That is, in the sub-control unit, based on the fact that the specific information is updated by the information updating unit, the first effect that is executed until the judgment by the judging unit that becomes the newly specified judgment result is executed. The number of times is specified by the number of times specifying means. The effect number information storage means stores the effect number information corresponding to the number of the first effects specified by the number specifying means. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means over the execution period of the first effect of the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage means.

Thus, when the second effect execution determining unit determines that the second effect is executed, the execution period of the first effect of the number of times indicated by the effect number information stored in the effect number information storage unit is set to the execution time of the second effect. Since the second effect can be executed by a simple control of setting it as the execution period, there is an effect that the processing load when executing the second effect can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C8, the sub-control unit reduces the number of times of performance information stored in the number-of-effects information storage unit by one, based on the reception of the determination result signal by the signal receiving unit. A gaming machine C9, characterized in that the gaming machine C9 is provided with an effect number information updating means for updating the corresponding effect number information.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine C8, the effect count information stored in the effect count information storage means is based on the determination result signal received by the signal receiving means in the sub-control means. Since the effect number information updating unit updates the effect number information corresponding to a smaller number of times, the second effect is more reliably continued until the execution period of the first effect corresponding to the determination information having the highest priority. The effect is that you can.

<Characteristic D group> (The range of the random number value acquired at the time of starting winning is sent to the sub as winning information)
In a gaming machine provided with main control means for executing main control relating to a game and sub-control means for performing control based on a control signal output from the main control means, the main control means is within a predetermined range. Judgment value generation means capable of updating and generation of judgment value, judgment value acquisition means for acquiring the judgment value generated by the judgment value generation means based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition, and Discrimination means for discriminating whether the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means matches a predetermined specific value, and if the judgment means determines that the judgment value matches the specific value, corresponds to the specific value Based on that the judgment value is acquired by the judgment value acquisition means and the control processing execution means that executes the processing set by the A small range specifying means for specifying which of the small ranges the judgment value belongs to, and a small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means are output to the slave control means. Signal output means, wherein the slave control means receives the small range signal output by the signal output means, and receives the small range signal by the signal receiving means. A gaming machine D1 further comprising: a discrimination result identifying unit that identifies a discrimination result by the discriminating unit based on the small range indicated by the small range signal.

According to the gaming machine D1, in the main control means, the judgment value generated by the judgment value generation means within the predetermined range is acquired by the judgment value acquisition means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition. The determination value acquired by the determination value acquisition unit is determined by the determination unit as to whether it matches a predetermined specific value. When it is determined by the determining means that the specific value matches, the control processing executing means executes the process set corresponding to the specific value. Based on that the judgment value is acquired by the judgment value acquisition means, a small range is specified to which small range the judgment value acquired this time belongs from among a plurality of small ranges obtained by dividing the predetermined range into a plurality of ranges. Specified by means. A small range signal indicating the small range specified by the small range specifying means is output to the slave control means by the signal output means. Further, in the slave control means, when the small range signal output by the signal output means is received by the signal receiving means and the small range signal is received by the signal receiving means, the small range indicated by the small range signal is triggered. Based on the above, the discrimination result by the discrimination means is specified by the discrimination result specifying means.

As a result, the sub-control unit can advantageously determine the determination result of the determination unit.

In the gaming machine D1, the sub-control unit includes a regulation information storage unit that stores regulation information that defines a correspondence between the type of the small range that can be notified by the small range signal and the determination result by the determination unit. The determination result identifying means identifies the determination result by the determining means based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the regulation information stored in the regulation information storage means. A gaming machine D2 characterized by the above.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the regulation information storing means stores the regulation information in which the correspondence between the type of the small range notified by the small range signal and the discrimination result by the discriminating means is regulated. Based on the type of the small range indicated by the small range signal and the regulation information stored in the regulation information storage means, the discrimination result identifying means identifies the discrimination result by the discrimination means.

As a result, there is an effect that the determination result can be easily specified based on the correspondence relationship defined in the definition information.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific value includes a plurality of types including at least one value set as a first specific value and one or more values set as a second specific value. Is provided, the control processing execution means executes the first processing when the determination value matches the first specific value, and the determination value matches the second specific value. A gaming machine D3, which executes a second process different from the first process when the game is performed.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, the specific value is provided with a plurality of types including at least one value set as the first specific value and one or more values set as the second specific value. When the determination value matches the first specific value, the control process executing means executes the first process, while when the determination value matches the second specific value, the control process executing means. As a result, a second process different from the first process is executed.

Thereby, there is an effect that various kinds of processing can be executed according to the type of the specific value with which the determination values match.

In the gaming machine D3, the small range in which the specific value is included in the small range is configured by only specific values of the same type.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the small range in which the specific value is included is composed of only the specific values of the same type, so that the specific values of different types are mixed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a range or a small range in which a specific value and a value different from the specific value are mixed. Therefore, the small range and the discrimination result by the discriminating means can be made to correspond one-to-one, so that the discrimination by the discrimination result specifying means can be executed under a condition closer to the discrimination by the discriminating means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the main control means stores at least the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means until a judgment condition for executing the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied. A gaming machine D5 comprising a storage means, wherein the signal output means is capable of outputting the small range signal to the slave control means before the determination condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the game machines D1 to D4, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the main control means, the judgment value acquired by the judgment value acquisition means is stored in at least the judgment value storage means until the judgment condition for executing the judgment by the judgment means is satisfied. Before the determination condition is satisfied, the signal output means outputs the small range signal to the slave control means.

This has the effect that the sub control unit can specify the discrimination result by the discrimination unit before the discrimination condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine D5, the main control means includes a discrimination result signal output means for outputting a discrimination result signal indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the sub control means receives the discrimination result signal by the signal receiving means. Based on that, based on the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying means, the first effect executing means for executing the first effect indicating the discrimination result notified by the received judgment result signal. Based on that the second effect execution determination unit that determines whether to execute the second effect and that the second effect is executed by the second effect execution determination unit, the determination result that is the target of the determination. And a second effect executing means for executing the second effect for a plurality of execution periods of the first effect including at least the first effect, the gaming machine D6.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D5, the following effect is produced. That is, in the main control means, the discrimination result signal indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is output by the discrimination result signal output means. In the sub control unit, the first effect execution unit executes the first effect indicating the determination result notified by the received determination result signal based on the determination result signal received by the signal receiving unit. To be done. Based on the determination result specified by the determination result specifying unit, the second effect execution determining unit determines whether to execute the second effect. Based on the fact that the second effect execution determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed, the first effect is executed over a plurality of first effect execution periods including at least the first effect indicating the determination result which is the target of the determination. The second effect is executed by the second effect executing means.

Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to diversify the effect mode.

In the gaming machine D6, the sub-control unit determines that the second effect execution determination unit limits the determination by the second effect execution determination unit based on the determination that the second effect execution determination unit determines to execute the second effect. And a canceling unit for canceling the determination restricted state based on the execution of at least one first effect after the execution of the second effect is completed. A gaming machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6. That is, in the secondary control means, the determination limit state setting means sets the determination limit state in which the determination by the second effect execution determination means is limited based on the determination by the second effect execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed. Is set. After the execution of the second effect is completed, the determination limit state is canceled by the canceling unit based on the execution of at least one first effect.

Accordingly, during execution of the second effect, and when at least one first effect is being executed after the second effect is finished, it is possible to prevent the second effect from being newly executed. Therefore, at least one first effect without the second effect can be executed after the second effect is finished and before the next second effect is started. Therefore, since the player can easily understand the timing when the second effect is finished, there is an effect that a more easily understandable effect can be realized.

In the gaming machine D7, the sub-control unit, the determination result information storage unit capable of storing the determination result information indicating the determination result specified by the determination result specifying unit with a predetermined number of information items as an upper limit, and the releasing unit. When the determination restriction state is released by the release determination means for determining whether to execute the second effect, based on the plurality of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means, Based on the fact that the release time determination means determines that the second effect is to be executed, the release that executes the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination A game machine D8, comprising a time executing means.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the sub-control unit, the discrimination result information storage unit stores the discrimination result information indicating the discrimination result specified by the discrimination result specifying unit, with the predetermined number of information items as the upper limit. When the determination restriction state is released by the release means, the release time determination means determines whether to execute the second effect, based on the plurality of pieces of determination result information stored in the determination result information storage means. Based on the fact that the release-time determining means determines that the second effect is to be executed, the second-time effect is performed by the release-time executing means over the execution period of one or a plurality of first effects that are executed after the determination. To be executed.

Accordingly, when the determination limited state is released, the execution of the second effect can be set without waiting for a new small range signal to be output from the main control means. Further, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the second effect, taking into consideration the determination result specified by the determination result specifying means based on the small range signal output during the determination limited state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more appropriately determine whether or not to execute the second effect.

<Characteristic E group> (The period until the ball hit right hits the attacker is longer than that when hit left)
A first flow path through which a game ball shot in a first direction can flow down, a second flow path through which a game ball shot in a second direction different from the first direction can flow down, and the first flow path A game ball that has flowed down the game ball and a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path are provided at a position where at least a ball can enter, and a predetermined value based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry device. And a bonus giving means for giving the bonus of, and the second flow path is fired in the second direction more than a period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the period until the played gaming ball reaches the ball entering means is longer.

Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is a win, the big winning opening is moved to a hit state in which it is opened and closed a predetermined number of times There is something. In such a conventional type gaming machine, a predetermined number of prize balls are given each time a game ball is won into the special winning opening during the hit state, so the player can enjoy the hit state as one enjoyment. It can be done.

However, in such a conventional type gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, so the game in the hit state is monotonous. There was a problem that became.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the game ball shot in the first direction flows down the first flow path, and the game ball shot in the second direction different from the first direction flows in the second flow path. Run down. A ball entering means is provided at a position where at least the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting device based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering device. The second period is such that the period until the game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entering means is longer than the period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entering means. A flow path is configured.

As a result, the player who wants the game ball to reach the ball entry means as soon as possible can shoot the game ball aiming at the first flow path, while it takes a relatively long time to play the game ball. It is possible to shoot a game ball aiming at the second flow path to a player who wants to reach the ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to select a preferred launching direction for each player to play the game, and thus it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine E1, in the ball entering means, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second flow path is higher than the ratio of the game balls flowing down the first flow path. A gaming machine E2 characterized in that it is arranged in.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the proportion of the game balls flowing down the second flow path is higher than the proportion of the game balls flowing down the first flow path. Since the ball entrance means is arranged at a high position, if the first flow path is flown down, the time required to reach the ball entrance means is shortened, but it becomes difficult to enter the ball entrance means. On the other hand, if it flows down through the second flow path, it is easy to enter the ball entering means, but the period until reaching the ball entering means becomes long. Therefore, there is an effect that the player himself/herself can select a firing direction that suits the taste of each player.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2, a gaming machine E3 is provided, which is provided with deceleration means for decelerating the flow velocity of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the flow-down speed of the game ball flowing down the second flow path is reduced by the speed reduction means, so that the game ball emitted in the second direction enters. There is an effect that the period until reaching the ball means can be made longer than the period until the game ball fired in the first direction reaches the ball entering means more reliably.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. Based on the changing means, the judging means for performing the judgment based on the establishment of the judging condition, and the judgment result of the judging means having a specific judgment result, the changing means is operated a predetermined number of times from the second position to the A game machine E4 comprising: a variable game executing means for executing a variable game variable to a first position.

The gaming machine E4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3. That is, the variable means is changed to the first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and the second position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first position. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The variable game is executed by the variable game executing means so that the variable means changes the number of times from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times based on the result of the determination made by the determination means.

As a result, there is an effect that a game can be played with the expectation that a particular determination result will be obtained by the determination by the determination means.

In the gaming machine E4, a launching means capable of launching a game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a launching interval equal to or longer than a specific launching interval, and during execution of the variable game, the changing means changes the second A first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on that a predetermined number or more of predetermined game balls enter the ball entering means after being changed from the position to the first position. The control means and the variable means based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position during execution of the variable game, And a second variable control means for changing the position to two positions, and during the specific time period, after the game ball is started to be fired in the second direction, the game ball is fired in the second direction at the specific firing interval. A gaming machine E5, wherein the specific number of game balls is at least longer than the period until the flow of the second flow path is completed.

The gaming machine E5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4. That is, the launch means is configured to be able to launch the game ball in the first direction and the second direction at a launch interval that is equal to or longer than a specific launch interval. During execution of the variable game, based on the fact that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position and a predetermined number or more of game balls enter the ball entering means, the variable means changes to the first position. It is changed to the second position by the first variable control means. During execution of the variable game, the variable means is changed to the second position by the second variable control means based on the passage of the predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. To be done. At least a specific period of time from when the game balls are launched in the second direction until a specific number of game balls launched in the second direction at a specific firing interval have finished flowing down the second flow path. Is configured to be longer.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction during execution of the variable game, a specific number of game balls can be inserted into the ball entering means before the specific period elapses. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the person from losing.

In the gaming machine E4, the variable game execution means sets a predetermined first period after the variable means is changed to the first position, when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game. The first variable operation is changed to the second position after the elapse of a predetermined variable pattern including the predetermined number of times, and the variable means is controlled so as to be variable. One or more of the specific variable patterns are controlled. During the execution period of the first variable operation of, the game ball launched in the first direction becomes reachable after the specific variable pattern is started, and the first variable pattern is started after the specific variable pattern is started. A gaming machine E6, characterized in that the gaming balls fired in two directions are difficult to reach.

The gaming machine E6 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4. That is, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the variable game, the variable unit is changed to the first position, and then the variable unit is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed. The variable game execution means controls the variable means to change in a specific variable pattern including a predetermined number of variable operations. During the execution period of one or a plurality of first variable operations in the specific variable pattern, the game ball launched in the first direction becomes reachable after the specific variable pattern is started, and the specific variable pattern is started. After that, the game ball shot in the second direction becomes difficult to reach.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the second direction, the chance of the game ball entering the ball-entering means is less than when the game ball is shot in the first direction. It has the effect of making you think.

In the gaming machine E6, as the game state after the execution of the variable game is finished, the first game state is set when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means in the variable game of 1, 1 A game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entering means in the variable game of Machine E7.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E6, as a gaming state after the execution of the variable gaming is finished, when the gaming ball does not enter the ball entering means in one variable game, the game is played. While the first game state is set by the state setting means, when the game ball enters the ball entering means in one variable game, the game state setting means makes the player more advantageous than the first game state. Since the game state is set, there is an effect that it is possible to perform the game while the variable game is being executed by paying more attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means.

In the gaming machine E6 or E7, the first flow path allows the flowing down game ball to reach the ball entering means from a third direction, and the second flow path causes the flowing down game ball to move in the third direction. Is to reach the ball entering means from a fourth direction different from, and the variable means is configured such that a game ball can flow down on the upper surface thereof while being changed to the second position, and The fourth direction side is arranged so as to be inclined so as to be higher than the third direction side, and the ball entrance means is in a state in which the variable means is variable to the first position. , The game ball can enter from above, and in a state where the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper side is closed by the variable means, and the variable means is The gaming machine E8, which is variable from the second position to the first position by sliding in a direction from the fourth direction side toward the third direction side.

The gaming machine E8 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6 or E7. That is, while the game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the ball entering means from the third direction, the game ball flowing down the second flow path from the fourth direction different from the third direction to the ball entering means. And reach. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, the game balls are configured to be able to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and the variable means is inclined so that the fourth direction side is higher than the third direction side. Are arranged. The ball entering means is configured so that the game ball can enter from above in the state where the variable means is changed to the first position. Further, in a state in which the variable means is changed to the second position, the upper side of the ball entering means is closed by the variable means. The variable unit is changed from the second position to the first position by sliding in the direction from the fourth direction side to the third direction side.

As a result, while the variable means is changing to the first position, it becomes difficult for the game ball that has arrived from the third direction side to enter the ball entering means, while the game ball that has arrived from the fourth direction side enters Easier to do. Therefore, during the execution of the variable game, the possibility of the game ball reaching the ball-entering means entering the ball-entering means in the case of firing in the second direction rather than firing the game ball in the first direction The effect is that it can be raised.

<Characteristic F group> (Right hitting during big hit is more advantageous than left hitting in one aspect, but is more disadvantageous than left hitting in another aspect)
A launching means capable of launching at least a game ball in a first direction and a second direction different from the first direction, a determining means for performing determination based on the satisfaction of a determination condition, and a determination by the determining means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of No. 1 and the first element relating to the advantage degree of the player in the privilege game are included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element advantage-making device that makes it more advantageous to the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during a specific period, and the first The second element different from the element is a second element that makes it more advantageous to the player that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. A two-element advantage means, and a gaming machine F1.

Here, in the case of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the result of the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening is a win, the big winning opening is moved to a hit state in which it is opened and closed a predetermined number of times There is something. In such a conventional type gaming machine, by winning the game ball into the special winning opening during the hit state, a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player such as the prize ball is given, so that the player wins the prize. The game can be played with one state of enjoyment.

However, in such a conventional gaming machine, in order to win the gaming ball to the special winning opening, it is necessary to shoot the gaming ball in a predetermined direction for each gaming machine, and the degree of advantage in the hit state ( Since the amount of the predetermined privilege that can be obtained) is predetermined, there is a risk that the winning state may be a work of simply continuing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Therefore, the conventional game machine has a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player in playing the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the launching means is configured to be able to launch at least the game ball in the first direction and the second direction different from the first direction. The determination is performed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the privilege game advantageous to the player is performed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination result of the determination by the determination means. The first element relating to the advantage degree of the player in the privilege game is that the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than being continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The first element is made advantageous by the first element making means. The second factor relating to the advantage degree of the player in the privilege game is that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction rather than being continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period included in the execution period of the privilege game. The second element is made advantageous by the second element making means.

This allows the player who wants to favor the first element to shoot the game ball in the first direction during execution of the privilege game, while the player who wants to favor the second element is controlled to move first. A game ball can be fired in two directions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a game property that suits the taste of each player.

In the gaming machine F1, a game ball shot in the first direction and a game ball shot in the second direction are provided at a position where at least the game ball can enter, and to the ball throwing means. And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of the game ball, a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entering means, and the ball entering means rather than the first position A variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult to enter, and a variable means that changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times during execution of the privilege game. A game machine F2 comprising: a control means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the ball entry means is provided at a position where at least the game ball shot in the first direction and the game ball shot in the second direction can enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting device based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering device. The variable means is variable between a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the first position. During execution of the privilege game, the variable means is changed by the variable control means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times.

As a result, the game can be played while paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, which has the effect of further improving the interest during the execution of the privilege game.

In the gaming machine F2, the first element advantaged means is one in which the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction rather than being continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the rate of entering the ball is increased.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, it is more likely that the gaming ball is continuously fired in the first direction than the gaming ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the execution period of the privilege game. Since the ratio of entering the ball entering means is increased by the first factor advantage means, the player who wants to play a game while the privilege game is being executed with a high rate of entering the ball entering means On the other hand, there is an effect that the game ball can be actively fired in the first direction.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the second element advantaged means is such that the game ball is continuously fired in the second direction during the specific period, rather than the game ball is continuously fired in the first direction. A gaming machine F4, characterized in that the number of gaming balls reaching the ball entering means is increased.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is preferable that the gaming ball is continuously fired in the second direction rather than being continuously fired in the first direction during the specific period. Since the number of game balls that reach the ball entrance means is increased by the second factor advantage means, the second direction is positively directed to the player who wants to make more game balls reach the ball entrance means. There is an effect that you can fire a game ball.

In the gaming machine F4, the variable control means changes the first variable operation to the second position after a predetermined first period has elapsed after the variable means was changed to the first position. The first number of times is executed during a specific time period, and the second element advantage optimizing means causes the game ball shot in the first direction after the specific time period is started to be the predetermined number of times of the first time. It is intended to prevent reaching the ball entering means before the execution period of the variable operation is completed, and at least a part of the execution period of the first variable operation of the predetermined number of times is the specific period. A game machine F5, which is a period during which the game ball shot in the second direction can be reached after the game machine F5 is started.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first variable operation, which is changed to the second position after a predetermined first period elapses after the variable unit is changed to the first position, is executed a first number of times during the specific period by the variable control unit. To be done. By the second factor advantage means, the game ball shot in the first direction after the specific period is started reaches the ball entry means until the execution period of the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation ends. Suppressed. At least a part of the execution period of the predetermined number of times of the first variable operation is configured to be a period in which the game ball shot in the second direction can reach after the specific period is started.

As a result, when the game ball is fired in the second direction, the game ball is made to reach the ball entering means during execution of the first variable operation a larger number of times than when the game ball is fired in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to obtain more opportunities to enter the entering means.

In the gaming machine F5, the second element advantaged means has a period until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entry means before the game ball shot in the second direction is reached. A gaming machine F6, which suppresses the flow-down speed of the game ball shot in the first direction so as to be longer than the period until it reaches the writing ball means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, the game ball shot in the second direction enters the ball until the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entry means. Since the flow speed of the game ball shot in the first direction is suppressed by the second element advantage optimizing means so as to be longer than the period until reaching the means, the game ball shot in the first direction is Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the ball from reaching the ball entrance means before the predetermined number of times of the first variable motion is completed. Therefore, shooting the game ball in the second direction has an effect that it is possible to increase the chances of entering the game ball more reliably.

In the gaming machine F5 or F6, the first variable operation has a predetermined period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position until the end of the change to the first position. The variable means is variable so as to be in the second period, and the first element advantage optimizing means causes the game ball shot in the second direction to enter the ball entering means during the second period. It is easier for the game ball shot in the first direction to reach the ball entering means during the second period than to reach the ball entering means. Characteristic game machine F7.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F5 or F6, the following effects are produced. That is, in the first variable operation, the variable means is arranged such that the period from the start of the change from the second position to the first position to the end of the change to the first position becomes the predetermined second period. Is variable. The game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period, as compared with the case where the game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entry means during the second period. The first element optimizing means makes it easier to enter the ball entering means.

Thereby, when the game ball is shot in the first direction, in addition to the first period in which the changing means is changed to the first position, also in the second period in the middle of changing from the second position to the first position. Since there is a possibility of entering the ball entering means, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the game ball can be entered into the ball entering means by launching the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball that has reached the ball entering means will enter the ball entering means when the game ball is fired in the first direction than when it is fired in the second direction. effective.

In the gaming machine F7, a game ball that has been launched in the first direction can flow down, and a first flow path that allows the flown down game ball to reach the ball entering means from a third direction, and in the second direction. The discharged game ball is allowed to flow down, and a second flow path for allowing the flown down game ball to reach the ball entering means from a fourth direction different from the third direction, and the varying means, While being changed to the second position, the upper surface of the game ball is configured to be able to flow down, and the upper surface is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. In the state where the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter from above, and the variable means has the second position. In the state of being changed to the above, the upper part is closed by the changing means, and the first element optimizing means is arranged in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side. A gaming machine F8, characterized in that the varying means is varied from the second position to the first position by sliding the varying means.

According to the gaming machine F8, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7. That is, the game ball shot in the first direction reaches the ball entering means from the third direction by the first flow path. The game ball shot in the second direction reaches the ball entry means from the fourth direction different from the third direction by the second flow path. While the variable means is being changed to the second position, the upper surface of the variable means can be played as a game ball. In addition, the upper surface of the variable means is inclined so that the third direction side is higher than the fourth direction side. While the variable means is changed to the first position, the game ball can enter the ball entering means from above, while the variable means is changed to the second position, the ball entering means. The upper part of the is closed by the variable means. When the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position, the first element optimizing means slides the variable means in the direction from the third direction side to the fourth direction side.

As a result, the game ball that has been launched in the second direction and has reached the upper surface of the variable means from the fourth direction side during the second period is returned to the fourth direction side due to the inclination of the upper surface of the variable means. Since gravity can be applied, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the ball entering means. On the other hand, the third direction side above the ball entering means is ready to enter from the upper side earlier than the fourth direction side, and thus is fired in the first direction and from the third direction side during the second period. It is possible to make it easy to enter the game ball that has reached the ball entering means. Therefore, the game ball launched in the first direction can have a higher ball entry rate when it reaches the ball entry means more reliably than the game ball launched in the second direction.

In any one of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a game state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, when the game ball does not enter the ball entering means during execution of the privilege game of 1 A game state setting means for setting one game state and setting a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state when a game ball enters the ball entering means during execution of the one privilege game. A gaming machine F8 comprising:

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F2 to F8, as a gaming state after the execution of the privilege game is finished, a game ball is entered into the ball entry means during execution of one privilege game. When the player does not enter the ball, the game state setting means sets the first game state. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the ball entering means during the execution of one privilege game, the game state setting means sets a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state. Therefore, by entering the game ball into the ball entering means, the game state after the execution of the privilege game is set to the advantageous second game state, so that the game ball enters the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game while the privilege game is being executed by paying attention to whether or not to play.

<Feature G group> (Provide routes on the right side that are easy to win for Den Chu and are difficult for attackers, and routes that are easy for Attackers and difficult for Den Chu)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first flow path through which the game ball launched by the launching means with a launch strength within a specific range can flow down, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, A first ball entering means in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter and a game ball flowing down the second flow path is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter, and a first ball entering thereof. Privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the ball means, a first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and a first position Based on the fact that the variable means that can be changed to the second position where it is difficult to enter the first ball entering means and the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the variable means is moved from the second position to the first position. A variable control means for changing the position and a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter. A game machine G1 comprising: a ball entering means.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a board surface is provided with a plurality of ball entrances. More specifically, a game ball entered, such as a starting opening that triggers a lottery to decide whether or not to move to the winning state, a large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter when the winning state is entered, etc. In some cases, a plurality of ball entrances are provided for different controls. In such a conventional game machine, since the ball entrance to be aimed is variable according to the game state, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of pointing the firing direction in accordance with the game state.

However, in such a conventional game machine, until the game state is changed, it is necessary to continue to shoot the game ball in the launch direction according to the current game state, so the game becomes monotonous, and the player There was a problem that it would be difficult to improve the interest in the game.

Further, there is also a method of providing a specific ball entrance in which a plurality of firing directions in which game balls can enter are set, and a game is aimed at the specific ball entrance in at least one game state. Although conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced due to the plurality of flow paths toward the specific entrance.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, it is possible for the game ball, which is launched by the launching means with a launch strength within a specific range, to flow down the first flow path and the second flow path different from the first flow path. Become. The first sphere means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter and the game ball flowing down the second flow path is difficult to enter. A predetermined privilege is granted by the privilege granting device based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering device. The variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and a second position at which it is more difficult to enter the first ball entering means than the first position. There is. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the satisfaction of the predetermined specific condition. The game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the game ball flowing down the first flow path is provided with the second ball entering means at a position where it is difficult to enter.

As a result, since the game ball may flow into both the first flow path and the second flow path by firing the game ball with a firing strength within a specific range, pay attention to the downward direction of the game ball. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the first flow path allows a game ball that has been launched with a launch strength within a first range included in the specific range to flow down, and the second flow path in the specific range. A gaming machine G2 which is included and is capable of flowing down a game ball which is launched with a launch strength within a second range different from the first range.

The gaming machine G2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1. That is, the game ball launched with the launch intensity within the first range included in the specific range can flow down the first flow path. In addition, the game ball which is included in the specific range and is emitted with the emission intensity within the second range different from the first range can flow down the second flow path.

As a result, the flow path into which the game ball flows can be made different depending on whether the game ball is fired with a firing strength within the first range or with a firing strength within the second range. The game ball can be flowed into any of the flow paths. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine G2, a game ball that has been launched with a launch strength outside the specific range can flow down, and it is difficult for the flown down game ball to enter the second ball entering means. And that the game ball has entered the third ball entering means capable of entering the game ball flowing down the third flow path, the second ball entering means, and the third ball entering means. 1 from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition and a determination means that performs determination based on And a game state setting means for setting a game state of the first game state, wherein the first game state is a third game ball rather than a ratio of game balls flowing down the second flow path into the second ball entering means. The rate at which the game ball flowing down the flow path enters the third ball entering means is high, and the second game state is that the game ball flowing down the third flow path is the third ball entering means. The rate at which the game balls flowing down the second flow path enter the second ball entering means is higher than the rate at which the variable control means is identified by the determination by the determination means. The game machine is characterized in that the variable means executes a variable game that is changed a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position, with the determination result being satisfied. G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2. That is, the third flow path is configured such that the game balls that are launched with a launch strength outside the specific range can flow down. The game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the third ball entering means, and it becomes difficult to enter the second ball entering means. Judgment is executed by the judging means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball entering means or the third ball entering means. Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, one game state is set by the game state setting means from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state. To be done. In the first gaming state, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second flow path to the third ball entering means is higher than the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second flow path to the second ball entering means. It becomes higher. In the second game state, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second flow path entering the second ball entering means is higher than the ratio of the game balls flowing down the third flow path entering the third ball entering means. Get higher A variable game in which the variable means is biased a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position is executed by the variable control means on the condition that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination by the determination means.

As a result, in the first gaming state, it is possible to efficiently perform the discrimination by the discriminating means by letting the third flow path flow down, while in the second gaming state, it is better to let the second flow path flow down. The discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of switching the shooting direction of the game ball according to the game state.

In the gaming machine G3, the first ball entering means is provided at a position where a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. A gaming machine G4 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter. Since it is provided, there is an effect that the player can select a favorite flow path during execution of the variable game.

In the gaming machine G4, the period until the game ball shot toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entering means is the game ball shot toward the third flow path. 1. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that the gaming machine G5 is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing the flow of the game ball in the first flow path so as to be longer than the period until it reaches the 1 ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G4, a period until the gaming ball shot toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entry means is directed toward the third flow path. Since the flow-down of the game ball in the first flow path is suppressed by the suppressing means so that the emitted game ball becomes longer than the time it takes to reach the first ball-entering means, the first speed is increased during execution of the variable game. For a player who wants to reach the 1 ball entering means, a game ball can be shot aiming at the third flow path, while for a player who wants to enjoy a variable game for a longer time. , There is an effect that the game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path.

In the gaming machine G5, the launching means is capable of launching a game ball at a launching interval that is equal to or longer than a specific launching interval, and the variable control means is configured such that the variable means is the second one while the variable game is being executed. A first variable that changes the variable means to the second position based on that a predetermined number or more of predetermined game balls enter the ball entering means after being changed from the position to the first position. The control means and the variable means based on the fact that a predetermined specific period has elapsed since the variable means was changed from the second position to the first position during execution of the variable game, Second variable control means for changing the position to two positions, and having the specific period, the specific number of shots at the specific launch interval after starting the launch of the game ball toward the first flow path. The gaming machine G6 is characterized in that it is at least longer than a period until it finishes flowing down the first flow path.

The gaming machine G6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G5. That is, the launching means is configured to be able to launch the game ball at a launching interval which is equal to or longer than a specific launching interval. During execution of the variable game, the first variable control is performed based on the fact that the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position and a predetermined number or more of predetermined game balls enter the ball entering means. The changing means is changed to the second position by the means. Further, during execution of the variable game, the variable means is moved to the second position by the second variable control means based on the passage of the predetermined specific period after the variable means is changed from the second position to the first position. Can be changed to. The specific period is longer than the period from when the game sphere is started to be fired toward the first flow path until the specific number of game spheres that have been fired at the specific firing interval have finished flowing down the first flow path. Is configured to be.

As a result, when the game ball is shot in the first flow path, it is possible to prevent the variable means from being changed to the first position before the specific number of game balls reach the first ball entering means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the predetermined privilege given when the game ball is shot in the first flow path during the execution of the variable game.

In any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, the first ball-in means is, when the variable means is variable to the first position, the first ball than the game ball flowing down the third flow path. A gaming machine G7, characterized in that the gaming balls flowing down the flow path are configured to have a higher entering ratio.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G4 to G6, when the variable means is varied to the first position, the first flow is lower than that of the game ball flowing down the third flow path. Since the first ball entering means is configured so that the rate of the game balls flowing down the road is higher, the variable game is being executed for the player who does not want to generate a waste ball. In addition, there is an effect that a game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path.

In any of the gaming machines G3 to G7, a third position at which the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position A variable second variable means, and a control means for controlling the second variable means to change from the fourth position to the third position based on the establishment of the first condition. The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that the first gaming state is less likely to satisfy the first condition than the second gaming state.

The gaming machine G8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G3 to G7. That is, the second variable means is configured to be variable between a third position where the game ball can enter the second ball entering means and a fourth position where the game ball is more difficult to enter than the third position. Has been done. Based on the establishment of the first condition, the second varying means is controlled by the control means so as to vary from the fourth position to the third position. The first game state is more difficult to satisfy the first condition than the second game state.

As a result, in the first gaming state, it is more reliable to allow the third flow path to flow down so that the determination by the determination means can be executed more efficiently, while in the second game state, the second flow path is allowed to flow down. This has the effect that the determination by the determination means can be performed more reliably and efficiently.

<Characteristic H group> (Informs the firing direction of the corresponding digestion time according to the mode of the jackpot production)
A launching means capable of launching a game ball, a first flow path through which a gaming ball launched in the first direction by the launching means can flow down, and a launching means launching in a second direction different from the first direction. A second flow path through which game balls can flow down, a specific period setting means for setting a specific period based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, Between a specific period ending means for ending the specific period based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established when a game ball flows down the first channel or the second channel, and between the specific period At least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect are included as the type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means. A type determining unit that determines one of a plurality of types, a suggestion effect executing unit that executes an suggestion effect that suggests the launch direction of the game ball in the specific period, and the suggestion effect executing unit. As the suggestive effect, the first suggestive effect suggesting the first direction is determined based on the determination of the first specific effect by the type determining means, and based on the determination of the second specific effect. And a suggestive effect determining means for determining a second suggestive effect that suggests the second direction, and the gaming machine H1.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a board surface is provided with a plurality of ball entrances. More specifically, a game ball entered, such as a starting opening that triggers a lottery to decide whether or not to move to the winning state, a large winning opening that allows the game ball to enter when the winning state is entered, etc. In some cases, a plurality of ball entrances are provided for different controls. In such a conventional game machine, since the ball entrance to be aimed is variable according to the game state, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of pointing the firing direction in accordance with the game state.

However, in such a conventional game machine, until the game state is changed, it is necessary to continue to shoot the game ball in the launch direction according to the current game state, so the game becomes monotonous, and the player There was a problem that it would be difficult to improve the interest in the game.

Further, there is also a method of providing a specific ball entrance in which a plurality of firing directions in which game balls can enter are set, and a game is aimed at the specific ball entrance in at least one game state. Although conceivable, there is a problem that the degree of freedom of the board surface configuration is reduced due to the plurality of flow paths toward the specific entrance.

According to the gaming machine H1, the game ball launched in the first direction by the launch means capable of launching the game ball can flow down the first flow path, and is launched in the second direction different from the first direction by the launch means. The game ball can flow down the second flow path. A specific period is set by the specific period setting means based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied, and after the specific period is set by the specific period setting means, the game ball plays the first flow path or the second flow path. The specific period ending means ends the specific period based on the establishment of the second condition that can be satisfied when the liquid flows down. The specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means during the specific period. As a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, one type is determined from among a plurality of types including at least a first specific effect and a second specific effect different from the first specific effect. In the specific period, the suggestive effect suggesting the shooting direction of the game ball is executed by the suggestive effect executing means. As the suggestive effect executed by the suggestive effect executing means, the first suggestive effect suggesting the first direction is determined by the suggestive effect determining means based on the first specific effect being determined by the type determining means. The second suggestive effect suggesting the second direction is determined based on the determination of the second specific effect.

With this, an appropriate firing direction can be suggested by the suggestion effect according to the type of the specific effect, so that the effect mode can be appropriately set.

In the gaming machine H1, a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the second flow path are provided with ball entry means provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the second condition is , Which can be established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball-in means, and the second flow path has a flow-down game ball into the ball-in means rather than the first flow path. A gaming machine H2, characterized in that it is configured so that a period until it reaches is likely to be long.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1. That is, the ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path and the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter. The second condition is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means. The second flow path is configured so that it takes a longer time until the game ball that has flowed down than the first flow path reaches the ball entry means.

As a result, when the second specific effect is determined, the period until the second condition is satisfied can be made relatively long, so that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect is secured. There is an effect that can be done.

In the gaming machine H2, it can be changed to a first position where the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position where the game ball enters the ball entering means more difficult than the first position. Variable means, a determination means for performing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the variable means from the second position to the first position based on the determination result by the determination means. Variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is variable a predetermined number of times, and the specific period setting means sets the specific period as the establishment of the first condition that the execution of the variable game is started. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine H3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2. That is, the variable means is configured to be variable between a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entering means and a second position at which the game ball is more difficult to enter the ball entering means than the first position. Has been done. A determination is executed by the determination means based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a variable game in which the variable means changes a predetermined number of times from the second position to the first position based on the result of the determination made by the determination means. It is executed by the variable game execution means. The specific period is set by the specific period setting means with the first condition being satisfied when the execution of the variable game is started.

Thereby, there is an effect that the effect mode can be suitably set during the execution of the variable game.

In either the gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is satisfied when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the ball entering means after the first condition is established. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by either the gaming machine H2 or H3, the second condition is that a predetermined specific number of gaming balls enter the ball entering means after the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the period until the second condition is satisfied by firing the game ball in the second direction rather than firing the game ball in the first direction. Therefore, there is an effect that a sufficient effect period for executing the second specific effect can be secured.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. And an operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period for making the operation on the means effective, wherein the second specific effect is one effect mode corresponding to the operation content for the operation means from a plurality of effect modes. A selection effect execution for executing one effect mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific effect, based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied. A gaming machine H5 comprising means.

The gaming machine H5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, the operation effective period setting means sets the operation effective period during which the operation on the operation means is effective during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is composed of an effect that allows the player to select one effect mode according to the operation content of the operating means from the plurality of effect modes. Based on the satisfaction of the second condition, one production mode selected by the player during execution of the second specific production is executed by the selection production execution means.

As a result, when the second specific effect is executed, it is possible to select the effect mode that the player likes as the effect mode that is executed after the second condition is satisfied, so that the second condition is satisfied. There is an effect that the interest of the player in the game afterwards can be improved.

In the gaming machine H5, a display means capable of displaying an image is provided, and in the second specific effect, a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means, and the plurality of images are displayed. One of the images includes at least a display mode in which the image is displayed in a specific display mode, and the identification is performed based on detection of an operation of the first operation content on the operation means during the operation valid period. Is displayed in the specific display mode based on the mode changing means for changing the image displayed in the display mode and the operation of the second operation content for the operation means being detected during the operation valid period. A gaming machine H6, characterized in that the gaming machine H6 is provided with an execution setting means for setting an effect mode corresponding to the displayed image as an effect mode executed by the selection effect executing means.

According to the gaming machine H6, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5. That is, in the second specific effect, at least a display mode in which a plurality of images corresponding to each of the plurality of effect modes are displayed on the display means and one image of the plurality of images is displayed in a specific mode is at least. include. The image displayed in the specific display mode is changed by the mode changing unit based on the detection of the operation of the first operation content on the operation unit during the operation valid period. Based on the detection of the operation of the second operation content on the operation means during the operation valid period, the effect setting corresponding to the image displayed in the specific display mode is performed by the execution setting means by the selection effect executing means. It is set as a performance mode to be executed.

As a result, there is an effect that the player can easily select the image and determine the effect by changing the operation content of the operation means.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, when the second specific effect is determined by the operation means operable by the player and the type determining means, the operation is performed during the execution period of the second specific effect. An operation effective period setting means for setting an operation effective period for making the operation on the means effective, and the second specific effect includes at least an effect mode for promoting a predetermined operation on the operation means. Amusement machine H7.

The gaming machine H7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H1 to H4. That is, when the second specific effect is determined by the type determining means, the operation effective period setting means sets the operation effective period during which the operation on the operation means is effective during the execution period of the second specific effect. The second specific effect is configured to include at least an effect mode that prompts a predetermined operation on the operation means.

This allows the player to positively operate the operation means during the execution of the second specific effect, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machines H5 to H7, operation determining means for determining whether or not an operation for the operating means is executed during the operation valid period, and the operation determination continuously for at least a predetermined number of operation valid periods. A determination control means for controlling the suggestion effect executing means to determine the first suggestive effect when it is not determined that the operation for the operation means has been performed by the means. Machine H8.

The gaming machine H8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines H5 to H7. That is, the operation determining means determines whether or not an operation on the operating means has been performed during the operation valid period. The determination control means so that the first suggestion production is decided by the suggestion production execution means when the operation discrimination means does not discriminate that the operation for the operation means has been continuously performed for at least the predetermined number of operation effective periods. Controlled by.

Thus, the type of suggestive effect can be determined in consideration of the tendency of the player's operation with respect to the operation means, so that the effect mode can be set more appropriately.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine A gaming machine Z1. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z2. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, B1 to B7, C1 to C9, D1 to D8, E1 to E8, F1 to F8, G1 to G8, H1 to H8, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or due to the operation of a predetermined time, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped, the It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. It requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of, and a lot of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Other>
To a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning prize is awarded when a game ball is entered and a starting winning slot in which a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to shift to a winning state or a game ball is entered. There are some which are provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls shot in a game area can enter, such as a special winning opening. In such a gaming machine, the easiness of entering the game ball is variable according to the game state, so that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of launching the game ball by aiming at a different entrance for each game state ( For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, until the gaming state is changed, it is necessary to continue to launch the game ball in the launch direction according to the current gaming state, so the game becomes monotonous and the player There was a problem that it would be difficult to improve the interest in the game.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a launching means capable of launching a game ball, and a first flow path through which the game ball launched by the launching means with a launch strength within a specific range can flow down. And, a second flow path different from the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path is difficult to enter. A first ball entering means provided at a position, a privilege giving means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and a game ball for the first ball entering means. Variable means that can be changed between a first position where the ball can enter and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the first ball than the first position, and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. Based on the variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position, a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the first flow path The second game ball provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down is difficult to enter.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the first flow path allows a game ball launched with a launch strength within a first range included in the specific range to flow down. And, the second flow path is included in the specific range, and is capable of flowing down the game balls that are launched with a launch strength within a second range different from the first range.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in which the game ball launched with a launch strength outside the specific range can flow down, and the flown down game ball is the second entry. A third flow path in which it is difficult to enter the ball means, a third ball entering means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the third flow path, the second ball entering means, and the third ball A discriminating means for discriminating on the basis of the fact that a game ball has entered one of the ball-entering means, and a first game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least two game states, and the first game state is a game ball flowing down the second flow path. The rate at which the game ball flowing down the third flow path enters the third ball entering means is higher than the rate at which the ball enters the second ball entering means, and the second game state is the second game state. The rate at which the game balls flowing down the three flow paths enter the second ball entering means is higher than the ratio at which the game balls flow down the third ball entering means. The variable control means changes the variable means from the second position to the first position a predetermined number of times when the specific determination result is obtained by the determination made by the determination means. A variable game is executed.
The game machine according to the technical idea 4 is the game machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the first ball entering means is a game ball flowing down the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the third flow path. And are provided at positions where balls can enter.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in which the period until the gaming ball shot toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entering means is Suppressing means for suppressing the flow of the game ball in the first flow path is provided so that the game ball shot toward the third flow path becomes longer than the period until it reaches the first ball entering means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the first flow path through which the gaming ball launched by the launching means with the launch strength within the specific range can flow, and the first flow path thereof. A second flow path different from the first flow path and a game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter. A first ball entering means, a privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and a game ball can enter the first ball entering means. Based on the fact that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, a variable unit that is variable between a first position and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the first ball entering unit than the first position. A variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position and a game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path. Is provided at a position where it is difficult to enter the ball.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first flow path is shot with a launch strength within a first range included in the specific range. A game ball can flow down, and the second flow path can flow down a game ball that is included in the specific range and that is launched with a launch strength within a second range different from the first range. It is a thing.
This makes it possible to easily change the flow path through which the game ball flows down by changing the firing intensity within the specific range, which has the effect of improving the convenience of the player.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the gaming ball launched with a launch strength outside the specific range can flow down and flow down. A third flow path in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, a third ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the third path can enter, and the second ball entering Discriminating means for discriminating on the basis of the game ball entering one of the ball means and the third ball entering means, and the first game state and its first state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition. A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state different from the one game state, and the first game state includes the second flow path. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the third flow path entering the third ball entering means is higher than the ratio of the game balls flowing down into the second ball entering means. 2 game state, the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entering means rather than the ratio of the game ball flowing down the third flow path into the third ball entering means. The variable control means determines that the specific condition is satisfied by the determination made by the determination means, and the variable means causes the variable means to move from the second position to the first position. A variable game that is changed to a predetermined number of times is executed.
As a result, in the first gaming state, it is possible to efficiently perform the discrimination by the discriminating means by letting the third flow path flow down, while in the second gaming state, it is better to let the second flow path flow down. The discrimination by the discriminating means can be executed efficiently. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give the player the pleasure of switching the shooting direction of the game ball according to the game state.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the first ball entering means includes the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path, and the third ball. Since the game ball flowing down the flow path is provided at a position where the player can enter the ball, there is an effect that the player can select a desired flow path during execution of the variable game. ..
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the gaming ball launched toward the first flow path reaches the first ball entering means. The flow down of the game ball in the first flow path is made so that the period until it becomes longer than the period until the game ball shot toward the third flow path reaches the first ball entering means. Since the suppressing means is provided, a player who wants to quickly reach the first ball entering means during execution of the variable game can shoot the game ball aiming at the third flow path. For a player who wants to enjoy a variable game for a longer time, there is an effect that a game ball can be shot aiming at the first flow path.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
110 Main controller (main control means)
113 voice lamp control device (subordinate control means)
223a winning information storage area (information storage means)
S214 privilege game execution means S305 determination means
Part of S310 first output means
S406 Discrimination information acquisition means
S407 Prior identification means
S408 Part of second output means, discrimination information signal generation means
S901 Part of first output means, part of second output means
S4111 signal receiving means
S4301 bit setting means
S4311 status setting means
S4405 Predetermined processing means
S4406 to S4408 information discriminating means, first execution discriminating means, first setting means
S4411 Second execution determination means
S4412, S4414 second effect executing means, second setting means
S4505 1st production execution means

Claims (1)

Main control means for executing the main control of the game,
In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control unit that performs control based on a control signal output from the main control unit,
The main control means,
A discriminating means for discriminating based on the establishment of the discriminating condition;
A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a predetermined specific determination result,
First output means for outputting a determination result signal indicating the determination result of the determination means to the slave control means,
Discrimination information acquisition means for obtaining discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means, based on satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Discrimination information configured to be able to store the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition unit with a predetermined number of specific information items as an upper limit until the obtained discrimination information is used for the discrimination by the discrimination unit. Storage means,
A second output means capable of outputting a discrimination information signal based on the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means to the slave control means before the discrimination condition is satisfied;
The sub-control means,
Signal receiving means configured to receive at least the discrimination result signal output by the first output means and the discrimination information signal output by the second output means,
First effect executing means for executing a first effect according to the determination result indicated by the received determination result signal based on the determination result signal received by the signal receiving means,
First execution determining means for determining whether to execute the second effect according to the received determination information signal, based on the reception of the determination information signal by the signal receiving means,
Based on the determination by the first execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination is performed. First setting means for setting execution,
On the basis of the reception of the discrimination information signal by the signal receiving means, the specific information corresponding to the received discrimination information signal is a predetermined number of information as an upper limit, and the corresponding discrimination result signal is the signal. An information storage means capable of storing until received by the reception means,
State setting means for setting a suppression state in which the setting of execution of the second effect is suppressed based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition;
Predetermined processing means for performing predetermined processing according to a predetermined rule at a time on all the specific information stored in the information storage means,
A unit configured to store predetermined data, which is a result of the predetermined processing, in a predetermined storage area, the data being composed of a group of data;
When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the suppression state is set, it is determined whether to execute the second effect using the predetermined data stored in the predetermined storage area. Second execution determining means,
Based on the determination by the second execution determination means that the second effect is to be executed, the second effect over the execution period of one or a plurality of the first effects executed after the determination is performed. A second setting means for setting execution, and a gaming machine.